JP6981058B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize diversification of games by means of variable ball entry means.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably realizing diversification of games.

Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The present invention
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed.
A first ball entry section and a second ball entry section provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters,
A first guiding means for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion and a first guiding means for moving the game ball to a first non-guidance position where the guidance is not performed.
A second guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion and a second guiding means for moving the game ball to a second non-guidance position where the guidance is not performed.
When the first guide means is arranged at the first guide position, the first guide passage for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion can be configured together with the guide path formed by the first guide means. Yes, constituting a second guide path for guiding the game balls to the second ball entrance portion with the guide path formed by the second guiding means when disposed in said second guide position by said second guide means Bei example a possible der Ru passage forming means,
The first guide passage is formed with a first insertion portion through which the passage constituting means is inserted, and the second guide passage is formed with a second insertion portion through which the passage constituting means is inserted. It is characterized by being.

The diversification of games can be suitably realized.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main composition of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the back pack unit. (A) A partially enlarged view of FIG. 6 showing a variable winning unit and its peripheral configuration, and (b) a perspective view of the variable winning unit as viewed from the front side. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 11 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning unit. (A) is a schematic view showing a drive mechanism, (b) is an arrow view of A in FIG. 13 (a), and (c) is a view of arrow B in FIG. 13 (a). (A) is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the drive mechanism, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor and the state of each variable winning device. (A1) Schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the first guide state, (a2) Schematic diagram showing the first guide route, (b1) Schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the second guide state, (B2) It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd guide path. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the state switching process of a variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the ball entering the first ball entry part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the ball entering the 2nd ball entry part. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and the increase in the number of balls held. It is a schematic diagram comparing the variable winning unit shown in 1st Embodiment and the conventional variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a variable winning unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit according to a third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a movable body and a movable core. (A) A front view showing a variable winning unit according to a fourth embodiment, (b) a perspective view of the variable winning unit, and (c) a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) Schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit according to the fifth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning portion and the number of winning balls, (c) Switching of guide destinations in the open / close execution mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows. It is a flowchart which shows the state switching process of a variable winning unit. (A) A flowchart showing a guidance start process, and (b) a flowchart showing a guidance end process. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of change of a guide destination. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the guide destination. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the guide destination. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit according to the sixth embodiment, (b) (c) is a schematic diagram showing switching of guide destinations, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing other variable winning units. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a variable winning unit according to a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit according to the eighth embodiment, (b) and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game ball. (A) A schematic diagram showing a driving force transmission path according to a ninth embodiment, (b) a flowchart showing a guidance start process, and (c) a flowchart showing a guidance end process. It is a timing chart which shows the movement of each movable plate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) A schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit according to a tenth embodiment, (b) a schematic diagram showing a holding structure, and (c) a schematic diagram showing a state change of the variable winning unit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game ball. (A) Schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit in the twelfth embodiment, (b), (c) Schematic diagram showing the flow of the game ball, (d) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and the operation period, (E) It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the hit type and the increase in the number of balls held. (A) is a front view of the variable winning unit according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the guide destination. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. (A) is a front view of the variable winning unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the guide destination. It is a schematic diagram of the variable winning unit in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the variable winning unit in 16th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification of the variable winning unit.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members on four sides and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the like.

The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. The support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is arranged behind the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a back pack unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. ing. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is said that.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is blocked from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder for holding the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to adopt a plurality of glass panels and to face each of these glass panels back and forth with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination unit 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window unit 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, an error display lamp unit 27 that lights up when a problem such as an error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the left and right of the error display lamp unit 27, during the payout of prize balls. A illuminating prize ball lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism described later while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game that does not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism. When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a saucer for storing the discharged game ball.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism described later. The rate of fire of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to reach a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. It will reach the region PE. Further, by adjusting this operation amount by the player, it is possible to separate the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The front door side upper plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are connected to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper plate passage are guided to the upper plate 33 and are guided to the front door side lower side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and by inserting the bearing portions provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft portions, the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the hook member 76 for the front door is arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. In the inner frame base body 50, a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 of the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 corresponds to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the front door hook member 76 provided in the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76. The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 77 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). And the lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked.

A storage recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodating recess 51 is recessed in the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 is fixed to the accommodating recess 51 in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine by a manual lock mechanism. .. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the accommodating recess 51, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear surface block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. The window hole 52 is in a state where almost the entire area thereof is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the back side of the game board 80a formed mainly of wooden plates and the game board 80a, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable production mechanism, etc.) described later. Is integrated with the back block 80b mounted on the base body 251.

The above-mentioned game area PE into which the game ball flows down is formed on the front surface of the game board 80a. As described above, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same as the game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in front of and behind each other. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 80a is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

The game board 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable winning unit 83, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged in each opening. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor provided corresponding to each entry portion, and a predetermined number is detected based on the detection result. Benefits such as prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that have not entered various entry sections or the like are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86. .. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 86, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83 is also referred to as "winning". do.

Further, on the game board 80a, various game parts such as a large number of game nails 87 and a windmill 94 are arranged in order to appropriately disperse the flow path of the game ball. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and a prize is generated in the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like with an appropriate probability.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached so as to cover the central opening from the back side of the game board unit 80. A variable display unit 85 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening, and the variable display unit 85 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An actuating port unit 82, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening. The actuating port unit 82 is provided with an upper actuating port 91 arranged below the variable display unit 85 and a lower actuating port 92 arranged below the upper actuating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the lower operating port 92 is provided with an electric accessory 93 as an opening / closing assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 93 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit for driving the movable piece, and is the same as the open state (auxiliary state) in which the ball can or easily enters the lower operating port 92. It is possible to switch to the closed state (non-assisted state) where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower operating port 92 (more specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 85), and was won by a lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball. In that case, the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the upper operating port 91, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 92, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

The variable winning unit (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 83 has a plurality of entry sections, and a guidance state for guiding the game ball to these entry sections (details are described later in the first guidance state and the second guidance state). It is possible to switch between the state) and the non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed. In the normal state, the variable winning unit 83 is maintained in the non-guidance state, and when the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) is won in the internal lottery (big hit: special that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state). It is configured to switch to the guidance state (when the transition to the game state is won). The open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts to the case where a big hit is won. In the open / close execution mode, for example, the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 8 pieces) is set as one round. It is set to repeat switching to the guidance state up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

Next, the variable display unit 85 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that variably displays (variates) the symbol by using the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 as a trigger. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled horizontally so as to be variablely displayed. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game board 80a is provided with a center frame 96 so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from the front surface side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front surface of the game board 80a. The gap between the ball and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 95, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 85 (specifically, the center frame 96). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from the left side and the above left route that detours from the left side.

A stage on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower part of the center frame 96. The game ball flowing in from the inflow port formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 is discharged onto the stage through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. Regarding the stage, the game ball that has reached the stage is relatively easy to flow into the upper operating port 91, specifically, it is easier to flow into the upper operating port 91 than the game ball that does not pass through the stage. It is configured to be, and contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with the transparent opening cover, and the game ball that has reached the stage is regulated so as not to move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 85) side.

A first holding lamp part and a second holding lamp part are provided on the front surface of the frame part forming the lower part of the center frame 96. The first holding lamp unit corresponds to the upper operating port 91, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the upper operating port 91 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the first holding lamp unit. It has become. The second holding lamp section on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 92, and the number of times the game ball has passed through the lower operating port 92 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the second holding lamp section. It is supposed to be done.

The actuating ports 91 and 92 are arranged at positions closer to the variable display unit 85. Since it is possible to shift to the special gaming state by using the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operating ports 91 and 92 and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 95. The fact that the operating ports 91 and 92 are provided near the variable display unit 85 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partition member 98 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with a guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 98 is provided with a stopper member and a main display unit 99 on which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 99 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display unit for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit is for the upper operating port display unit that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the upper operating port 91, and for the lower operating port that displays the lottery result performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 92. It has a display unit. In the display unit for the upper operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the upper operating port 91, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper operating port 91 is performed. The result is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating port 91 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit for the upper operating port, and the stop result is predetermined. After the pattern of is displayed, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode.

In the display unit for the lower operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the lower operating port 92, and as a result of the stop of the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operating port 92 is performed. The result is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower operating port 92 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the display unit for the lower operating port, and the stop result is predetermined. After the pattern of is displayed, the mode shifts to the above-mentioned open / close execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the actuation ports 91 and 92, the variation display is started on the corresponding actuation port display unit, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the game is played until the variation display is stopped. It corresponds to one time. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the actuation ports 91 and 92 is awarded, the single one is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the game is played once until the variable display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed. It is also possible to.

Further, in the main display unit of the main display unit 99, in addition to the above both display units, a through gate display unit for displaying lottery results based on winning a prize in the through gate 84 is provided. In the through gate display unit, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as the stop result of the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown. Will be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 93 provided in the lower actuating port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of holdings is displayed on the main display unit of the main display unit 99. A display unit for the number of pending numbers is provided.

The main display unit described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 5, a game ball is launched into the game area PE below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. The ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and the base plate 114 to which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as the main configurations, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50 to provide the same. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined diagonally so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove-shaped portion.

A ball stopper for holding the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the above-mentioned launch standby position is arranged at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. .. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and both rails 101 and 102 form a section of the guide passage 103. Has been done. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a reverse return prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning to the same guidance passage 103. It is attached to prevent the game ball that has reached the game area PE in advance from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to deliver the game ball to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guidance passage 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the region along the inner rail 101 is a region in which the game ball does not substantially pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112, the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other with the lower end edge of the game board unit 80 interposed therebetween. Have been placed. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board unit 80. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap is formed at a predetermined interval between the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage through the above gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the door. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is urged at a front position that closes the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, the game balls are prevented from falling out from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess (game board accommodating portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game board unit 80. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game board 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 to form a game board 80a and a back block. It is integrated with 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable effect mechanism and the like, and the back side thereof is an arrangement area for a control device for controlling various configurations thereof and the variable display unit 85 (design display device 95). It has become.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back surface side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 95 (see FIG. 6) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 95 is attached. The symbol display device 95 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device 95 is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box can be inserted by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are designed so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after opening the package. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the board box 163 main body is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably coupled to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game board unit 80 corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, and is on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 81 or the like are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 86 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 86.

Further, the base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b has, as the detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entry portions, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball winning in the general winning opening 81, and an operating port 91. , 92 is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and the winning detection mechanism is configured by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and forms a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearing pin 214 is provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and is open upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. To. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function for distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Formed so as to lead to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and to lead the outer opening to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball derived from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam can be cleared.

In the power supply / emission control device 243, the power supply / emission control board is housed in the substrate box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the cutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 166 provided in the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main portion 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine to expose the back portion of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the above-mentioned various switches are difficult to operate when the game machine main unit 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the game machine by a person who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster). Is difficult.

In the type of gaming machine described in detail above, the display effect function is enhanced by increasing the size of the symbol display device 95. However, if the symbol display device 95 is to be enlarged, the area where the game ball flows down (the game area PE) will be compressed, and there are restrictions on the arrangement of various game parts arranged in the game area PE. Becomes stronger. There is room for improvement in the structure of these game parts in order for various game parts to coexist in the limited game area PE. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the configuration of the variable winning unit 83 provided in the game board unit 80 is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83 will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80 (FIG. 6) showing the variable winning unit 83 and its peripheral configuration, FIG. 11 (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83, and FIG. 12 (a) is variable. A vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the winning unit 83 (partial cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 11A), and FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the variable winning unit 83.

(Variable winning unit 83)
An opening 89 (see FIG. 12) penetrating back and forth is formed at the lower portion of the game board 80a, specifically, at a position between the out port 86 and the operating port unit 82. The variable winning unit 83 is fixed to the gaming board 80a in a state of being fitted into the opening 89 from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 11, the variable winning unit 83 has a housing 310, and a pair of left and right ball entry portions 331, 341 is projected from the front surface of the game board 80a on the front surface portion 312 of the housing 310. Is formed. The main body 311 of the housing 310 is formed with ball passages 333 and 343 that guide the game balls that have entered the ball entry portions 331 and 341 to the back side of the game board 80a. The game ball that has moved to the back side of the game board 80a through the ball passages 333 and 343 is returned to the island facility of the game hall via the collection passage of the back block 80b.

As shown in FIG. 12B, detection sensors 334 and 344 for detecting game balls passing through the ball passages 333 and 343 are arranged at intermediate positions of the ball passages 333 and 343. The detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 (specifically, MPU) reaches the ball entry unit 331 and 341 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensors 334 and 344. We are monitoring the presence or absence of a ball. When the main control device 162 identifies that a ball has entered the ball entry units 331 and 341, a privilege is given to the player.

In the present embodiment, there is a difference between the privilege based on the entry into the first ball entry section 331 and the benefit based on the entry into the second entry section 341. Specifically, when a ball enters the ball entry section 331 on the right side (corresponding to the "first entry section"), the first predetermined number (15 in detail) of prize balls is given as a privilege. When a ball enters the ball entry section 341 on the left side (corresponding to the "second entry section"), it is more advantageous to the player than the privilege based on the entry into the entry section 331 on the right side. As a privilege, a second predetermined number (10 in detail) of game balls will be given. In the following description, the right ball entry section 331 is referred to as a "first ball entry section 331", and the left ball entry section 341 is referred to as a "second ball entry section 341".

As shown in FIG. 11, in the first entry section 331 and the second entry section 341, a game ball can pass through the entrance portion 332 of the first entry section 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second entry section 341. They are arranged so as to face each other with a gap (specific region SE). That is, both the game ball entering the first entry section 331 and the game ball entering the second entry section 341 are configured to pass through the specific area SE, and both of the specific area SEs are present. It is an introduction part to the entrance part 332,342.

Behind the specific area SE, movable bodies 350 and 360 that can slide and move in the front-rear direction are arranged. The movable bodies 350 and 360 have a substantially flat plate shape, and are arranged in a state of being tilted so that the plate surface faces diagonally upward. The main body 311 of the housing 310 is formed with an accommodating portion 313 for accommodating the movable bodies 350 and 360. The accommodating portion 313 communicates with the slits 314 and 315 formed in the front portion 312, and the movable bodies 350 and 360 accommodated in the accommodating portion 313 can appear and disappear in the specific area SE through the slits 314 and 315. It has become. In the following description, the position protruding into the specific region SE through the slits 314 and 315 (specifically, the position where the protrusion amount becomes larger than the radial dimension of the game ball) is referred to as the protruding position, and is specified by being accommodated in the accommodating portion 313. The position where the protrusion to the region SE is avoided is referred to as a retracted position.

The movable bodies 350 and 360 stand by in the retracted position in the normal gaming state, and move to the protruding position from the retracted position when the player shifts to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It will be moved as appropriate.

The main body 311 of the housing 310 is formed with a guide groove in which the left and right ends of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are engaged with each other. Due to these guide grooves, the moving direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360 intersects (orthogonally) the parallel direction of the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341, and more specifically, the thickness direction of the game board 80a. Is stipulated as. The engagement between the guide groove and the movable body 350, 360 is maintained regardless of whether the movable body 350, 360 is in the retracted position or the protruding position.

In the specific area SE, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the protruding positions, so that a guide path for guiding the game ball to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is formed. Here, the relationship between the movable bodies 350 and 360 and the guide path (guide destination of the game ball) will be described.

When the movable body 350 is arranged at the protruding position, the first guide path (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15)) is such that the upper surface 351 of the movable body 350 inclines downward from the second ball entry portion 341 side to the first ball entry portion 331 side. a) See) is formed. That is, when the movable body 350 is arranged at the protruding position, the first guide path leading to the first ball entry portion 331 appears in the specific region SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE hits the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350, changes its direction, and heads toward the first ball entry portion 331, so that it is avoided to pass through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 350 will be referred to as a first movable body 350. By arranging the first movable body 350 in the protruding position, it functions as a "ball receiving portion" that receives the game ball flowing down the game area PE from below.

On the other hand, when the movable body 360 is arranged at the protruding position, the upper surface 361 of the movable body 360 causes a second guide to be inclined downward from the first ball entry portion 331 side to the second ball entry portion 341 side. A path (see FIG. 15 (b)) is formed. That is, when the movable body 360 is arranged at the protruding position, the second guide path leading to the second ball entry portion 341 appears in the specific region SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE hits the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360, changes its direction, and heads toward the second ball entry portion 341, so that it is avoided to pass through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 360 will be referred to as a second movable body 360. By arranging the second movable body 360 at the protruding position, it functions as a "ball receiving portion" that receives the game ball flowing down the game area PE from below.

As described above, regarding the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device having the first ball winning portion 331 and the first movable body 350, and the second ball winning portion 341 and the second movable body 360 are provided. The first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are switched between an accepting state in which the game ball is accepted and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the accepted state. It is possible. In view of such circumstances, the gap between the upper end portion of the first ball entry portion 331 and the upper end portion of the second entry portion 341 (upper inflow port OE) is the entry port (inflow port) to each variable winning device. ) Can be said to be formed.

The first movable body 350 extends from a portion close to the upper end edge of the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 to a portion close to the lower end edge of the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331, and is second movable. The body 360 extends from a portion close to the upper end edge of the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331 to a portion close to the lower end edge of the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341. That is, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect at an intermediate position between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341. Specifically, the second movable body 360 is formed with a recessed portion 363 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the second movable body 360. The recessed portion 363 extends in the slide direction so as to straddle the front end portion and the rear end portion of the second movable body 360, and the first movable body 350 is inserted through the recessed portion 363. Both movable bodies 350 and 360 are in a crossed state.

Here, the vertical width of the entrance portions 332, 342 of each entry portion 331, 341 is larger than the gap between the entrance portions 332, 342, and the specific region SE is horizontally long. Then, the height difference between the most upstream portion (the end portion on the second ball entry portion 341 side) and the most downstream portion (the end portion on the first ball entry portion 331 side) of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 The height difference between the most upstream portion (the end on the first ball entry portion 331 side) and the most downstream portion (the end on the second entry portion 341 side) is equivalent to the vertical width of the entrance portion 332,342. The widths of both movable bodies 350 and 360 in the juxtaposed direction of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are the same as the above gap (details are slightly smaller). Therefore, at the intersection of both movable bodies 350 and 360, the crossing angle of the upper and lower facing parts is an obtuse angle (120 ° in detail), and the crossing angle of the right and left facing parts is an acute angle. Iku is 60 °). The inclination of the first movable body 350 with respect to the horizontal plane is smaller than 45 ° (specifically, 30 °), and the inclination of the second movable body 360 with respect to the horizontal plane is also smaller than 45 °. (Specifically, 30 °).

In the front view of the gaming machine, the specific area SE is divided into an upper area, a lower area, a right area, and a left area by the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the positions overlapping with the lower area in each of these areas. The out port 86 is located at. That is, the out port 86 is arranged between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341.

Of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE, those that have not entered either the first ball entry unit 331 or the second ball entry unit 341 flow into the out port 86 as they are and are discharged from the game area PE. Will be done. Although the variable winning unit 83 is arranged at a position closer to the inner rail 101, the diameter dimension of the game ball is located between the inner rail 101 and the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341. A larger gap is secured, and the game ball that reaches the lower part of the game area PE without passing through the specific area SE flows into the out port 86 so as to cross below the variable winning unit 83.

Here, in the present embodiment, the drive source for the first movable body 350 and the drive source for the second movable body 360 are shared, and the power from the drive source (drive motor 321) is driven. One of the features is that the structure is transmitted to the movable bodies 350 and 360 via the mechanism. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the drive mechanism of the variable winning unit 83 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 (a) is a schematic view showing the drive mechanism, FIG. 13 (b) is an arrow view of FIG. 13 (a), FIG. 13 (c) is a view of arrow B of FIG. 13 (a), and FIG. 14 ( a) is a schematic diagram showing the movement of the drive mechanism, and FIG. 14 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor 321 and the state of each winning device.

A drive motor 321 is mounted on the main body 311 of the housing 310. The drive motor 321 is connected to the main control device 162, and the output shaft 322 rotates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162 (specifically, MPU). The drive motor 321 is a stepping motor, and the rotation angle is controlled by a pulse of a drive signal from the main control device 162.

As shown in FIG. 13A, a drive gear 323 (specifically, a bevel gear) is fixed to the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 and is driven between the drive gear 323 and the movable bodies 350 and 360. A transmission block 325 is arranged to transmit the force to the movable bodies 350 and 360.

For example, when sliding the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 back and forth, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are configured to transmit power to the central portion in the width direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360. It is possible to prevent the direction of the body from shifting to the left or right (rotation such as swinging). However, as described above, since the two movable bodies 350 and 360 shown in the present embodiment intersect at the central portion, it is difficult to transmit the power to the central portion of both the movable bodies 350 and 360. Further, since the movable bodies 350 and 360 are horizontally long in the first place, when power is transmitted to the central portion, a difference in movement of the left and right end portions is likely to occur. This is assumed to be an obstacle in stabilizing the operation of the movable bodies 350 and 360. Hereinafter, a device for eliminating the occurrence of such inconvenience will be described. The transmission block 325 is composed of a transmission unit for the first movable body 350 and a transmission unit for the second movable body 360, but the basic configuration is the same for these transmission units. Therefore, in the following description, the transmission unit for the first movable body 350 will be described first, and the transmission unit for the second movable body 360 will be referred to in the description.

The transmission unit for the first movable body 350 is arranged on the left and right sides of the drive gear 323 and engages with the drive gear 323 to rotate the driven gear 326 following the drive gear 323 (composite of bevel gear and spur gear). It has a gear) and a rack 329 that moves in the front-rear direction with the rotation of the driven gear 326. The rack 329 is connected to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, respectively, and the first movable body 350 slides back and forth as the rack 329 moves back and forth. By transmitting the power of the drive gear 323 to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, the generation of low tension due to the power transmission is suppressed, and the movement of the first movable body 350 is stabilized.

When the left and right driven gears 326 of the drive gear 323 are arranged, the rotation directions of the drive gears 323 are opposite to each other. Therefore, by interposing the reversing gear 328 between one of the driven gears 326 and the rack 329, the rotation direction, that is, the operating direction of the rack 329 is unified.

The basic configuration of the transmission unit for the second movable body 360 is the same as that for the transmission unit for the first movable body 350, and the driven gear 327 engaged with the drive gear 323, the reversing gear 328, and the rack 330 are provided. Have. Here, the driven gear 327 is arranged between the driven gears 326. Specifically, the driven gears 326 and 327 are arranged so as to alternate at equal intervals in the rotation direction of the drive gear 323.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the drive gear 323, a plurality of tooth portions are arranged in the rotation direction, and the engaging portion 324a that engages with the driven gears 326 and 327 and the tooth portion are omitted (the tooth portions are omitted. Blank portions 324b (which avoids engagement with the driven gears 326 and 327) are alternately formed. More specifically, in the drive gear 323, the engaging portion 324a (0 ° to 89 °) → the blank portion 324b (90 ° to 179 °) → the engaging portion 324a (180 ° to 269 °) → in the rotation direction. The blank portion 324b (270 ° to 359 °) is divided into four parts, and the second movable body 360 is in a state where the driven gear 326 for the first movable body 350 and the drive gear 323 are engaged with each other. Engagement with the driven gear 327 for the first movable body 350 is avoided, and when the driven gear 327 for the second movable body 360 and the drive gear 323 are engaged, the engagement with the driven gear 326 for the first movable body 350 is avoided. Is avoided.

When the drive motor 321 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (first specific direction) when both movable bodies 350 and 360 are in the initial state arranged in the retracted position, the driven gear follows the drive gear 323. 326 rotates. As a result, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position (see FIG. 14 (b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. Therefore, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 stays in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 15A, when the first movable body 350 moves to the protruding position, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 becomes the upper end edge of the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 and the first. It is arranged on a virtual line connecting the lower end edge of the entrance portion 332 of the entry portion 331, and is inclined downward from the second entry portion 341 side to the first entry portion 331 side in the specific area SE to the first entry portion 331. The first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball is formed.

By switching the first variable winning device from the non-accepting state to the accepting state in this way, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the first ball entry unit 331. Further, in the receiving state, the movement path of the game ball toward the second entry portion 341 (for example, the second guide path GP2) is cut off by the first movable body 350 and rebounds to the first movable body 350, etc. It is avoided that the game ball is entered into the second entry portion 341.

When the return condition is satisfied after the first movable body 350 is placed in the protruding position (acceptance state), the drive motor 321 rotates clockwise (second specific direction), and the driven gear follows the rotation. 326 rotates. As the drive gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0 °), the first movable body 350 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. Therefore, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 stays in the retracted position.

When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position, the first guide path GP1 formed in the specific region SE disappears, and the above-mentioned first variable winning device switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state.

Next, when both movable bodies 350 and 360 are in the initial state in which they are arranged in the retracted position, when the drive motor 321 rotates in the clockwise direction (second predetermined direction), it follows the drive gear 323. The driven gear 327 rotates. As a result, the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position (see FIG. 14 (b)). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. Therefore, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 stays in the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the second movable body 360 moves to the protruding position, the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 becomes the upper end portion of the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 and the second. It is arranged on a virtual line connecting the lower end of the entrance portion 342 of the entry portion 341, and is inclined downward from the first entry portion 331 side to the second entry portion 341 side in the specific area SE to the second entry portion 341. The second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball is formed.

In this way, the second variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the second ball entry unit 341. Further, in the receiving state, the movement path of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331 (for example, the first guide path GP1) is cut off by the second movable body 360 and rebounds to the second movable body 360, etc. It is avoided that the game ball is entered into the first entry portion 331.

When the return condition is satisfied after the second movable body 360 is placed in the protruding position (acceptance state), the drive motor 321 rotates counterclockwise (first predetermined direction) and follows it. The gear 327 rotates. As the drive gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0 °), the second movable body 360 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. Therefore, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 stays in the retracted position.

When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position, the second guide path GP2 formed in the specific region SE disappears, and the above-mentioned second variable winning device switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state.

As shown in FIG. 13, the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment is configured to transmit to the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 by using the link mechanism. In this link mechanism, the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body 350 to the protruding position, and the first movable body 360 moves to the protruding position in conjunction with the movement of the second movable body 360. The movable body 350 moves to the retracted position. Therefore, when one of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 is arranged in the protruding position, it is avoided that the other is arranged in the protruding position. That is, it is avoided that both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged in the protruding positions. By limiting the movable body located in the specific region SE in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the specific region SE from staying in the specific region SE.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

The MPU is mounted on the main control board provided in the main control device 162. The MPU is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM. It is an element with a built-in RAM, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, a ROM function or a RAM function, is provided as another element.

The MPU is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like are connected to the input side of the MPU. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board, and power is supplied to the MPU via the power failure monitoring board. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor for the general winning port 81, a detection sensor for the upper operating port 91, a detection sensor for the lower operating port 92, a detection sensor for the through gate 84, and a variable winning unit 83. The detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signal) from these various detection sensors, the MPU of the main control device 162 executes a winning judgment (ball winning judgment) for each ball entry portion. Will be done. Further, in the MPU, a big hit generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the upper operating port 91 and the lower operating port 92, and a support generating lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball corresponding to the winning. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and the winning to the first winning unit (first variable winning device) 331 is specified. If this is the case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, and if a prize is specified for the second ball entry section (second variable winning device) 341, 10 game balls are paid out. When the prize ball command corresponding to the above is output and the prize for the upper operating port 91 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output and the prize for the lower operating port 92 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. It should be noted that each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU, a drive unit for driving the electric accessory 93 attached to the lower operating port 92, a drive motor 321 for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360 of the variable winning unit 83, and a main display unit 99 (main display). The hold number display unit and the display unit for various ball entry units are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board, and the MPU executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

That is, in the special gaming state (open / close execution mode), the drive control of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83 is executed in the MPU so as to switch the variable winning device into the accepted state / the non-accepted state. Further, when the electric accessory 93 of the lower operating port 92 is won in the open state (support winning), the drive control of the drive unit for the electric accessory 93 in the MPU is performed so that the electric accessory 93 is opened and closed. Is executed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the upper operating port display unit or the lower operating port display unit in the main display unit 99 (main display unit) is executed in the MPU.

Further, an external terminal plate is connected to the output side of the MPU. The external terminal board is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. When the game result is a big hit result, the MPU can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, in the normal state, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board relays between the main control board and the power supply / emission control device 243, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board, the payout control device 242, etc. is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. ..

Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and the launch intensity (rate of fire) of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 based on the information from the operation level detection sensor. ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball launch handle 41, and in the power supply / launch control device 243, the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. It is configured so that it can be grasped whether or not it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor, and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated, the game ball is launched. Will be allowed.

The information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, the notification / effect control device 140, and the display control device 150 via the power supply / emission control device 243.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM in which various control programs and fixed value data are stored, and a control program stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like at the time of execution.

The MPU of the notification / effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 150. It controls. Specifically, in the notification / effect control device 140, a variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 95 and a stop display mode of the symbol to be finally stopped are displayed (for example, of the symbol) based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the like are determined, and the determined content is added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 150.

The display control device 150 includes a display control board on which an MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing a control program stored in the ROM. It has a built-in RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing such as, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, and a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. There is. The MPU executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on a command input from the notification / effect control device 140.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

The MPU of the main control device 162 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the main display unit (setting of the light emitting mode), a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 95, and the like. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of big hits, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the hit type such as the probabilistic big hit result and the normal big hit result, and the symbol display device 95 deviate from each other. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when executing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the operation port display unit and the symbol display device 95 of the main display unit 99. A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 93 of the lower operating port 92 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control device 162. The hold ball storage area of the RAM is provided with a hold area for the operation port and an execution area. The holding area includes the first area to the fourth area as the holding area for the upper operating port, and the winning random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer according to the winning history to the upper working port 91. Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas as hold information.

In the 1st to 4th areas, when the upper operating port 91 is awarded multiple times in succession, each numerical information is displayed in the order of 1st area → 2nd area → 3rd area → 4th area. It is stored in series. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four game ball entry histories into the upper actuating opening 91 can be reserved and stored.

In addition, the first area to the fourth area are provided as the holding area for the lower operating port, and the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter stored in the lottery counter buffer according to the winning history of the lower operating port 92. Each numerical information of C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any area as hold information.

In the 1st to 4th areas, when the lower operating port 92 is awarded multiple times in succession, each numerical information is displayed in the order of 1st area → 2nd area → 3rd area → 4th area. It is stored in series. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four game ball entry histories into the lower actuating opening 92 can be reserved and stored.

The execution area is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area when the variable display is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area.

More specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operating port 91 or the lower operating port 92.

The value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 603. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means.

In the gaming state where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the big hit are three, "7", "307", and "507". Is. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the actual jackpot probability by one lottery is 1/200. It has become. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the above lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the big hit are "5", "7", "36", and so on. .. 30 pieces of "572" and "598". That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "5", "7", "36" ... "572", "598" correspond to the big hit result, and one lottery is performed. The actual jackpot probability is 1/20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. In addition, in each lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that wins the big hit, it is out of order.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reach the maximum value (that is, 49), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. As for these plurality of jackpot results, a difference is set in the mode of drive control of the variable winning unit 83 in the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode includes an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode in which the first winning section 331 is the entry destination, and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode in which the second winning section 341 is the entry destination. It is roughly divided into.

(Distribution of game results)
The distribution destination of the game result to the hit type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery) is a distribution table in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM of the main control device 162. It is stored as (distribution information group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, as the distribution table, the distribution table for the upper operating port (first distribution information group) in FIG. 17 (a) and the distribution for the lower operating port in FIG. 17 (b). A table (second distribution information group) is set.

In the distribution table for the upper operating port, as shown in FIG. 17A, 16R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) and 8R probability variation jackpot result A (high probability corresponding game) are distributed to the game result. Result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) is set, and in the distribution table for the lower operating port, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), 16R probability variation is set as the distribution destination of the game result. A jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), an 8R probability variation jackpot result B (high probability corresponding game result), and an 8R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 16R. It is a big hit result that the mode becomes a high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which have been shifted due to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, will be continued until the next jackpot result is obtained.

The 8R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. This is a big hit result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which have been shifted to the 8R probability variation jackpot result A, will be continued until the next jackpot result is obtained.

The 8R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. This is a big hit result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, which have been shifted to the 8R probability variation jackpot result A, will be continued until the next jackpot result is obtained.

The 8R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. It is a big hit result that the mode becomes a high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode that has been shifted due to the 8R normal jackpot result is continued until the number of game times executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

In the distribution table for the upper operating port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to the result A, and "30 to 49" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the lower working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 49", "0 to 14" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 8R. It corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result B, and "30 to 49" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS mainly controls the variation display time in the display unit for the upper operating port and the display unit for the lower operating port of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95. Used in determining in the MPU of device 162. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display in the display unit for the upper operation port and the display unit for the lower operation port and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 95.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value (that is, 250), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM of the main control device at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 93 of the lower operating port 92 to the open state by the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 93 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 93 is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU of the main control device 162, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the upper actuating port display unit and the lower actuating port display unit. The variable display time table storage area of the ROM is used in the determination. Further, in the MPU, the stop result in the upper operating port display unit and the lower operating port display unit DR is determined by using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area. However, in making that decision, the ROM stop result table storage area is used.

(About various processes executed by the MPU of the main controller 162)
Next, each control process executed by the MPU of the main control device 162 will be described. MPU processing is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, normal processing that is executed after the main processing is completed, and timer interrupt processing that is started by interrupting the normal processing periodically. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then the normal processing will be described.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) started by the MPU of the main controller 162.

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the upper operating port 91, a winning detection flag for the upper operating port is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM, and a ball has entered the lower operating port 92. If it is determined, the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in various flag storage areas. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84, the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in various flag storage areas. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry unit 331, the winning detection flag for the first ball entry unit is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, and the ball enters the second ball entry unit 341. When it is determined that the ball has been entered, the winning detection flag for the second ball entry section is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

In the following step S104, a winning process for passing through is executed in association with winning the winning through the through gate 84. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service holding area on condition that the number of stored items on hold is less than 4. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating ball entry portion accompanying the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interrupt process is executed. To finish.

In the winning process for the activated ball entry portion, first, whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating port 91 (starting winning) is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM as the winning detection flag for the lower operating opening. Judge by whether or not. When it is determined that the prize detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that a prize has been awarded to the upper operating port 91, three game balls are paid to the payout control device 242. Set the prize ball command to issue. Then, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that the game ball has won a prize is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side to the upper operating port 91. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that a prize has been generated for the upper operating port 91.

After that, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area for the upper working port is read, and the hold storage number related to the upper working port stored in the hold area is set. Subsequently, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the upper operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, that is, when the winning is generated in the lower operating port 92 instead of the upper operating port 91, the payout control device is used. Set a prize ball command to pay out 4 game balls to 242. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the lower operating port 92 to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the lower operating port 92 has won a prize.

After that, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area for the lower actuating entry section is read, the hold storage number related to the lower actuating port stored in the hold area is set, and then the information is acquired. Processing is performed and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if the game ball does not win in any of the upper operating port 91 and the lower operating port 92, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

In the information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not the set start hold storage number is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number of the corresponding hold area for the result display unit is incremented by 1 and the total number is increased. Number of Holds The value stored in the storage area (hereinafter referred to as the number of common holds) is incremented by 1.

After that, the updated values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area area of the corresponding hold area for the result display unit, that is, 1. Store in the storage area corresponding to the incremented hold storage number.

That is, when the start hold storage number for the upper operating port is set, each value of the updated hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS is set to the upper operating entry ball. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area for the unit, that is, the hold area corresponding to the start hold storage number for the upper operation incoming ball unit incremented by 1.

Further, when the start hold storage number for the lower actuating port is set, the updated values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are put on hold for the lower actuated ball entry section. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the area, that is, the hold area corresponding to the start hold storage number for the lower actuating entry portion incremented by 1.

Subsequently, it is a process for causing the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 150, which are control devices on the sub side (secondary side), to recognize that a prize has been generated for the upper operation port 91 or the lower operation port 92. Executes the hold information confirmation process and the hold command setting process. After that, if the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is cleared and the information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S209 and S210 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for game rounds such as a change start command, a type command, and a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for open / close execution mode is set, it is notified. -Send to the effect control device 140. In addition, the output is set for the external terminal board according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

In the following step S203, a game time control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game round control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a big hit and a distribution judgment of a big hit type are performed, a change display of a symbol is set by the symbol display device 95, and a display unit for an operation port in the main display unit 99 (main display unit). Display control such as.

After that, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode), a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like.

In step S205, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 93 provided in the lower actuating port 92 is executed. In this electric service support process, a lottery for opening the electric service is used to determine whether or not to open the electric service 93 using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM. (Support lottery) is performed, and when the electric accessory open state is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 93 is executed. Further, the display control of the through gate display unit in the main display unit 99 (main display unit) is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 93, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. In this case, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, the high-frequency support mode is set, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM. Then, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 93 is in the open state is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory 93 is won, and once. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory 93 is won in the open state and the open state of the electric accessory 93 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

Incidentally, when the open / close execution mode is entered, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

In the following step S206, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch condition is provided on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch control device 243 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once during the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular striking such as a so-called stop striking is not performed, the firing of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the firing operation is performed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board to the NMI terminal of the MPU, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power supply has been cut off, so the power failure processing after step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S212, RAM access is prohibited in step S213, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 20 to 21.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the game state transition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (open / close execution mode) is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not it is the timing at which the game round of 1 is completed (specifically, the timing at which the preset fixed display period has elapsed after the variation display is completed). Is determined. If it is not the timing when the game round is completed, the main game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If it is the timing when the game round is finished, the process proceeds to step S303, and whether the game result of this game round (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special gaming state (open / close execution mode). Judge whether or not. Specifically, whether any of the 16R probability variation jackpot result correspondence flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot result A correspondence flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot result B correspondence flag, and the 8R normal jackpot result correspondence flag is stored in the RAM of the main control device 162. Judge whether or not. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the special game state (open / close execution mode) is executed in step S304. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning unit 83 by the lock device is released, and the operation of the variable winning unit 83 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the stored jackpot result correspondence flag corresponds to 16R. If an affirmative determination is made in step S305, "16" is set in the round number counter OC provided in various counter areas of the RAM in step S306. If a negative determination is made in step S305, "8" is set in the round number counter OC provided in various counter areas of the RAM in step S307.

After executing the processes of steps S306 and S307, it is determined in step S308 whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the above-mentioned 16R probability variation jackpot result or 8R probability variation jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309. In step S309, the first winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

After executing the process of step S309, or when a negative determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S310 and an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 150 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 95, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 150 as a display content command. In the display control device 150, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 95 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched. After executing the process of step S310, the external signal setting process is executed in step S311 to end the game state transition process.

Returning to the description of step S301, if it is determined in step S301 that the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode is in progress), the process proceeds to step S312. In step S312, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the state switching process (ball entry control process) of the variable winning unit 83 is executed in step S313. Here, the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Status switching process of variable winning unit 83)
In the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being guided to either the first entering portion 331 or the second entering portion 341. .. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83. When the ball is not being guided to the ball entry portions 331 and 341, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is “0”. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S402, the opening / closing process of the winning opening of the main prize is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is “0”. The timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the guidance period and the non-guidance period (interval period) to the ball entry units 331 and 341, and the value thereof each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Is subtracted by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S403, this state switching process is terminated.

If the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S404, and whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the first winning mode. To judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is set to the first ball entry portion 331 as a guide destination. If an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the process proceeds to step S405 to execute a process of forming a flow path (first guide path GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal is output so as to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 ° in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the second winning mode, a negative determination is made in step S404, and the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, a process of forming a flow path (second guide path GP2) to the second ball entry portion 341 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output so as to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 ° in the second specific direction (clockwise direction).

After executing the process of step S405 or step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC, and "8" is set in the winning counter PC in the following step S408. That is, in the variable winning unit 83 in the present embodiment, (1) the occurrence of a predetermined number (8) of winnings, and (2) the passage of the predetermined guidance period (30 sec) are set as the round end condition (guidance end condition). Will be done.

After executing the process of step S408, the guidance start command indicating that the guidance to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 has been started (the round has started) is set in step S409, and this state switching process is performed. finish. This set guidance start command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the start of guidance based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S401, if it is determined in step S401 that the guide to the first ball entry unit 331 or the second ball entry unit 341 is being guided, the process proceeds to step S410, and the value of the timer counter TC is "0". It is determined whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S411, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 set as the guide destination. Is determined based on the detection signal from the detection sensors 334 and 344. If no prize has been won, this state switching process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a prize has been won, the setting process of the prize command is executed in step S412. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 140, and the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, is changed by the winning command.

After executing the command setting process in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S414, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". ..

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S414, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when a positive judgment is made in step S410 (that is, it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC is "0". Case) means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, the guidance end process is executed in step S415. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the first winning mode, the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is rotated by 90 ° in the second specific direction to return to the initial state. A drive signal is output to the drive motor 321. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the second winning mode, the drive motor 321 is to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 ° in the first specific direction to return to the initial state. The drive signal is output to.

After executing the process of step S415, the process proceeds to step S416 to execute the update process of the round number counter OC. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not "0", the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the same round number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S417, the process proceeds to step S418. In step S418, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec).

After executing the process of step S417, the guidance end command is set in step S419, and the present state switching process is terminated. This set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S417, if it is determined in step S417 that the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

Then, in step S421, after setting the ending command, the present state switching process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 20), after executing the state switching process in step S313, it is determined in step S314 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is "0", and in step S315. Determine if the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the round number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, after executing the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S316, this game End the state transition process. When the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result, the upper limit is set for the number of times of support for the high frequency support mode that usually shifts after the jackpot result. Specifically, "100" is set in the game count counter stored in various counter areas of the RAM. As a result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained until the game is played 100 times after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when the game reaches "100", the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode. ..

Here, with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 22 and 23, the flow of the game in the first winning mode and the flow of the game in the second winning mode will be supplementarily described.

In the first winning mode, the driving target is limited to the first movable body 350, and when the round start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (b), the first movable body. Of the 350 and the second movable body 360, the former moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, the first guide path GP1 that is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed in the specific region SE between the ball entry portions 331 and 341.

In this state, the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE and has reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the first ball entry portion 331 side, and reaches the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350. By moving along the ball, the ball flows into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is restricted by the first movable body 350, the inflow of the game ball that has reached the specific area SE into the entrance portion 342 is restricted. Be avoided.

If the number of winnings to the first ball entry portion 331 reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number (upper limit number), or if the guidance period elapses before reaching the upper limit number, FIG. 22 (b) → FIG. 22 (c). As shown in, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entry section 331 is released, and it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the first ball entry section 331.

When a predetermined interval period has elapsed after the end of the guidance, the first movable body 350 moves to the protruding position again as shown in FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (b). As a result, the guidance to the first ball entry portion 331 will be resumed. In the first winning mode, by repeating such movements of the first movable body 350, prizes are frequently given to the first winning portion 331, and the winning balls based on the winning to the second winning portion 341. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases.

In the second winning mode, the driving target is limited to the second movable body 360, and when the round start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 23 (a) → FIG. 23 (b), the first movable body. Of the 350 and the second movable body 360, the latter moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, a second guide path GP2 that is inclined downward to the second entry portion 341 is formed in the specific region SE between the entry portions 331 and 341.

In this state, the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE and has reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the second ball entry portion 341 side, and reaches the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360. By moving along the ball, the ball flows into the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341. At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is restricted by the second movable body 360, the inflow of the game ball that has reached the specific area SE into the entrance portion 332 is restricted. Be avoided.

If the number of winnings to the second ball entry portion 341 reaches the above-mentioned upper limit number, or if the above-mentioned guidance period elapses before reaching the above-mentioned upper limit number, FIG. 23 (b) → FIG. 23 (c). As shown, the second movable body 360 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the guidance of the game ball to the second ball entry section 341 is released, and it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the second ball entry section 341.

When a predetermined interval period has elapsed after the end of the guidance, the second movable body 360 moves to the protruding position again as shown in FIG. 23 (a) → FIG. 23 (b). As a result, the guidance to the second ball entry portion 341 will be resumed. In the second winning mode, by repeating such movements of the second movable body 360, prizes are frequently given to the second winning portion 341, and the winning balls based on the winning to the second winning portion 341. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases.

The first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 have the same probability of entering the game ball that has reached the specific area SE, but are given based on the entry into the entry sections 331 and 341. There is a difference in benefits. Therefore, when the first winning mode and the second winning mode are compared, there is a difference in the rate of increase (increasing speed) of the balls held. Hereinafter, changes in the holding ball depending on the type of jackpot result will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 24.

The 16R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to the first winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the first winning portion 331. The privilege based on the entry into the first entry section 331 is 15 prize balls, which greatly increases the number of balls possessed by the player.

The 8R probability variation jackpot result B also corresponds to the first winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the first winning portion 331 as in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result. However, while the number of rounds executed for the 16R probability variation jackpot result is "16", the number of rounds executed for the 8R probability variation jackpot result B is "8". Therefore, although the increase speed of the balls held is the same as the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the total number of prize balls won is about half of the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

Similar to the 8R probability variation jackpot result B, the 8R probability variation jackpot result A is common in that it shifts to a high probability game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and is in the open / close execution mode. The number of rounds to be executed is also "8", which is the same as the 8R probability variation jackpot result B. However, the 8R probability variation jackpot result A corresponds to the second winning mode, and the guide destination of the game ball is set to be the second winning portion 341. The privilege based on the entry into the second entry section 341 is 10 prize balls, which is less than the prize balls based on the entry into the first entry section 331. Since the ball entry probabilities of the game balls are the same for the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341, the increase speed and the total number of balls held by the player are lower than the 8R probability variation jackpot result B. It will be.

As for the 8R normal jackpot result, it corresponds to the second winning mode as in the 8R probability variation jackpot result A, and the increase speed of the player's ball and the increase speed of the player's ball are compared with the 16R probability variation jackpot result and the 8R probability variation jackpot result B. The total number of acquisitions will be lower.

By providing a difference in the mode of granting the privilege in this way, the monotonicization of the game in the open / close execution mode is suppressed. By using a plurality of variable winning devices having different benefits, it is possible to realize diversification of games. However, if it is attempted to secure the occupied area of those variable winning devices, it becomes difficult to coexist with other game parts arranged in the game area PE. Regarding the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, devise a configuration in which the first variable winning device having the first winning section 331 and the second variable winning device having the second winning section 341 coexist. This makes it possible to dramatically reduce the occupied area. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the difference from the conventional variable winning unit. 25 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, and FIG. 25 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the conventional variable winning unit 83X. For convenience of explanation, these two variable winning units are shown. Are listed side by side.

In the gaming machine shown in FIG. 25 (b), the variable winning unit 83X is configured by two variable winning devices (first winning section 331X and second winning section 341X). It is the same as the variable winning unit 83 (see FIG. 25A) shown. Here, the first ball entry portion 331X has a horizontally long shape, and the entrance portion 332X of the first ball entry portion 331X can be opened and closed by the first movable body 350X (first shutter) which also has a horizontally long shape. It is covered. The second ball entry portion 341X also has a horizontally long shape, and the entrance portion 342X of the second ball entry portion 341X is covered by the horizontally long movable body 360X (second shutter) so as to be openable and closable. ing. By moving the first movable body 350X from the closed position to the open position, entry of the first ball entry portion 331X into the entrance portion 332X is permitted, and by moving the second movable body 360X from the closed position to the open position. , The entry of the second entry portion 341X into the entrance portion 342X is permitted.

In this variable winning unit 83X, the variable winning unit 83X is downsized by vertically arranging two horizontally formed variable winning devices. However, since the introduction area of the game ball to each of the ball entry portions 331X and 341X is set individually, the occupied area of the entire variable winning unit 83X is large.

On the other hand, in the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, the region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball-entry unit 331 and the second ball-entry unit 341 is connected to the ball-entry units 331 and 341. It functions as an introduction area, and the introduction area to each entry unit 331, 341 is shared. Specifically, the inflow OE to the specific area SE substantially functions as the entry port of the bivariable winning device. As a result, even when the introduction area is increased to improve the frequency of entering the ball entry portions 331 and 341, it is possible to prevent the variable winning unit 83 from becoming larger due to this. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, the vertical width dimension L1 of the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment is about half that of the vertical width dimension L2 of the conventional variable winning unit 83X.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a gaming machine of a type in which a player is given a privilege by entering a ball entering a ball formed in the gaming area PE, the player is better when the size of the entering portion is larger than when the size of the entering portion is small. It is easy to give the impression that it is easy to enter the ball. However, when an attempt is made to dispose a large ball entry portion in the game area PE, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry portion in the game area will be large and the degree of freedom of placement will be significantly reduced. In particular, when trying to realize diversification of the game by using a plurality of ball entry sections with differentiated benefits based on the ball entry, multiple large ball entry sections exist in the game area PE. It is expected that the influence on the above arrangement will be even stronger.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the region (specific region SE) sandwiched by the first ball entry portion 331 (specifically, the entrance portion 332) and the second entry portion 341 (specifically, the entrance portion 342) is entered. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE is shared as an introduction area for introducing the game ball into the ball portions 331 and 341, and each entry portion 331 is provided by the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 as "guidance means". , The occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by the configuration of guiding to 341. That is, while miniaturizing the ball entry portions 331 and 341 themselves, the gap between the first entry section 331 and the second entry section 341 (that is, the inflow port OE to the predetermined region) is made as if the entry sections 331 and 341 were entered. It can be made to look like an entrance. As a result, the actually small ball entry portions 331 and 341 can be made to appear larger than they actually are. In this way, using the two ball entry portions 331 and 341 together to increase the appearance of the entrance gives the player the impression that the ball entry is easy, and is advantageous in improving the motivation for playing.

In each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 shown in the present embodiment, the distance between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 is the entrance portion of the ball entry sections 331 and 341 in the front view of the gaming machine. It is configured to be larger than the opening width (vertical width) of 332,342. This makes it possible to suitably exert the above visual effect while suppressing unnecessary expansion of the occupied area of the variable winning unit 83. Further, almost the entire movable bodies 350 and 360 described above are contained in the specific area SE, and the protrusion of the specific area SE to the outside is suppressed when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Such a configuration is preferable in order to exert the above visual effect.

When the variable winning unit 83 is in the first guide state and the second guide state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes through (passes through) the specific area SE as it is, that is, the ball entry unit 331. , 341 is supposed to hinder the impression that the gap is the entrance. Here, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 forming the first guide path GP1 and the second movable body 360 forming the second guide path GP2 receive the game ball flowing down the game area PE and the second movable body 360 thereof. The structure is such that the flow direction is changed so as to face the entry portion 331, 341 side which is the guide destination. The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are formed so as to straddle the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341. Therefore, almost all of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE under the conditions of the first guide state and the second guide state go to the first ball entry section 331 or the second entry section 341. It will be guided, and the structure is such that the above-mentioned passing of the game ball is avoided. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In the configuration in which the game ball is guided to the entry portions 331 and 341 by the inclination of the guidance paths GP1 and GP2, if the inclination is gentle, the period required for guidance becomes long, and if the inclination is to be increased, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83 becomes large. It will be bulky. Therefore, while aligning the lateral widths of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 in the juxtaposed direction of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 with the separation distances of both ball entry portions 331 and 341, the height difference between the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is adjusted to the ball entry portions 331 and GP2. By aligning the vertical widths of 341, it is possible to realize smooth guidance of the game ball while maximizing the guide paths GP1 and GP2 so as to fit in the specific area SE.

When the two entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side and the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, there is a high possibility that the entry into the entry portion other than the guide destination will occur. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed so as to block the inflow port OE of the specific region SE and the inlet portion of the ball entry portion that is not the guide destination. It is possible to suitably avoid entering a ball that does not enter the ball.

In the configuration in which the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 are formed in the specific region SE, by overlapping a part of the two guide paths GP1 and GP2, the gap between the two ball entry portions 331 and 341 (flow). The game ball that has passed through the entrance OE) can be used to earn a guide target, and both guide paths GP1 and GP2 can be suitably coexisted within a limited range.

When the specific area SE functions as an introduction unit to the first ball entry unit 331 and the second ball entry unit 341, it becomes difficult or impossible to dispose of other game parts in the specific area SE. .. Therefore, by using this specific region SE as the operating region of the first movable body 350 for the first guide path GP1 and the second movable body 360 for the second guide path GP2, the operations of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are performed. In order to secure the area, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a dead space around the variable winning unit 83 in which other game parts cannot be arranged. This is a preferable configuration in order to suitably improve the degree of freedom in arranging the variable winning unit 83.

The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 can slide and move in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, and the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the movable bodies 350 and 360 projecting to the specific area SE. Will be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the operating area of the movable bodies 350 and 360 to the portion outside the specific area SE in the game area PE. Therefore, the coexistence of the variable winning unit 83 and the peripheral parts can be suitably realized.

As described above, it is preferable to use a plurality of variable winning devices having a movable body and a ball entry portion in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the winning device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the winning device will become stronger. It is feared that such limitation of arrangement may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention described above. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 formed by the movable bodies 350 and 360 stages intersect with each other, and one of the guide paths GP1 and GP2. The department is standardized. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the winning device and preferably exert an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the movement destination of the game ball is reversed while partially overlapping the guide paths GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the game ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

The first movable body 350 forming the first guide path GP1 and the second movable body 360 forming the second guide path GP2 receive the game ball flowing down the game area PE, and the ball entry portion whose flow direction is the guide destination. It is configured to be changed so as to face the 331, 341 side. By configuring the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 to intersect at the intermediate portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 (the receiving width of the game ball) is increased. It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the winning device due to this. The intersection of the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 is located in a specific region SE which is a region sandwiched between the first entry portion 331 and the second entry portion 341, and both of them. The total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 and the inclination with respect to the horizontal plane are the same. As a result, the prize-winning device has been further miniaturized.

As shown in the present embodiment, both entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, and the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are inclined downward toward the entrance portions 332 and 342. It is a sloping passage. As described above, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided by using the inclination of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the moving speed of the game ball depends on the inclination angle. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the intersection of the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 in the specific region SE, the total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 (the receiving width of the game ball). It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the winning device due to the increase in size.

In a configuration in which the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350 and the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect, the presence of the guide path on one side is the movable body on the other side. It can be a factor that hinders the movement of. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 can slide and move in the thickness direction of the game board 80a. When the first movable body 350 is arranged at the protruding position (corresponding to the "guide position"), a part of the first movable body 350 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80a to form the first guide path GP1. When the second movable body 360 is arranged at the protruding position (corresponding to the "guide position"), a part of the second movable body 360 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80a to form the second guide path GP2. Will be done. With such a configuration, the presence of the first guide path GP1 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the second movable body 360, and the presence of the second guide path GP2 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the first movable body 350. It can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably alleviate the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the operation timing of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360.

As described above, in the configuration in which both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are slid and moved in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, a recessed portion 363 (corresponding to the “insertion portion”) is formed in one of the movable bodies 360, and this recessed portion is formed. By inserting the other movable body 350 through the missing portion 363, it is possible to preferably prevent the movement of the other movable body from being hindered by the one movable body.

In a configuration in which the movable bodies 350 and 360 have a flat plate shape and the rolling surface of the game ball in the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is formed by the plate surface, the recessed portion 363 forms a rolling surface (intersection) on the rolling surface (intersection). A blank occurs. If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball will spill through the blank, and the guidance function may deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, the movable body 350 (inserted into the insertion portion) in which at least the recessed portion 363 is not formed is inserted. By forming the thickness dimension of the movable body 350) on the side smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When a ball enters the first entry section 331, 15 prize balls are given to the player as a "first privilege", and when a entry into the second entry section 341 occurs. Is given 10 prize balls as a "second privilege" to the player. When there is a difference in the superiority of each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 in this way, it is not possible to smoothly guide the game ball to the first ball entry section 331 on the side that is advantageous to the player. It is assumed that it may be a factor that lowers a person's willingness to play, or a factor that makes it difficult to differentiate a game by reducing the superiority of the first ball entry portion 331. Therefore, the above blank is generated not in the first guide path GP1 toward the first entry section 331 where the privilege given is large, but in the second guide path GP2 toward the second entry section 341 where the privilege given is small. Thereby, the occurrence of these various inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

With respect to the above-mentioned first guide path GP1 and second guide path GP2, it is difficult or impossible to dispose other gaming parts on the route. Therefore, the region in which the first guide path GP1 is formed is used as the operating region of the second movable body 360, and the region in which the second guide system GP2 is formed is used as the operating region of the first movable body 350. Then, the operating area can be suitably secured. If such a coexistence relationship is established, it is preferable that the ball entry device becomes bloated due to the increase in the receiving width of the game ball even when the total length of each guide path GP1 and GP2 is lengthened. Can be suppressed.

It is possible to provide a ball entry section 331,341 in the game area PE and guide the game ball to each entry section 331,341 using movable bodies 350, 360 as a variable "guide section". It is preferable for realizing diversification of games and increasing the degree of attention to games. However, if a drive unit (actuator) is arranged for each of the ball entry units 331 and 341, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will be complicated.

In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the first guide path GP1 by the first movable body 350 is formed by setting the drive mode of the drive motor 321 to the first drive mode (rotation in the first specific direction). Then, by setting the second drive mode (rotation in the second specific direction), the second guide path GP2 by the second movable body 360 is formed and the guide destination of the game ball is switched, that is, the variable winning is made depending on the drive mode. If the unit 83 is configured to switch between the non-guided state / the first guided state / the second guided state, it is possible to realize diversification of the game while suppressing the complicated electrical configuration of the gaming machine.

As described above, in switching the guide destination due to the difference in the operation mode of the drive motor 321, the state is switched by reversing the rotation direction of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 as shown in the present embodiment. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operational stability when performing the above. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine due to a malfunction or the like by a simple configuration.

When the first movable body 350 for the first ball entry section 331 and the second movable body 360 for the second ball entry section 341 are used in combination, if the drive unit is simply shared for the movable bodies 350 and 360. The following inconveniences may occur. That is, when the first movable body 350 is moved, the second movable body 360 moves following it, and when the second movable body 360 is moved, the first movable body 350 moves following it. As a result, there is a concern that the load on the drive unit will increase and the responsiveness when switching states will decrease.

Therefore, in the transmission block 325 shown in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 350 is moved, the power transmission to the second movable body 360 is avoided, and when the second movable body 360 is moved, the power is avoided. By avoiding the transmission of power to the first movable body 350, it is possible to suppress an increase in load when a plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are driven targets, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in responsiveness. Further, by devising so that the operation timings of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 do not overlap and limiting the transmission target of the power from the drive motor 321, the deterioration of the responsiveness is more preferably suppressed. It is possible.

The variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment can also have the following configuration.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the out port 86 is arranged between the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. It is also possible to dispose another entry portion (for example, a general winning opening, an actuating opening, a through gate, etc.) between the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341. Is. Hereinafter, a specific example thereof will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 26.

In the example shown in FIG. 26A, a through gate 84A through which the game ball can pass is arranged above the specific region SE. A lower operating port 92A is arranged at a position below the through gate 84A with the movable bodies 350 and 360 interposed therebetween, and the game ball passing through the through gate 84A is directed toward the lower operating port 92A.

As shown in FIG. 26B, regarding the electric accessory 93A attached to the lower operating port 92A, the guide piece 93aA slides in the front-rear direction to guide the ball into the lower operating port 92A. It is configured to switch to the non-guided state. By aligning the operating direction of the guide piece 93aA with the operating direction of the movable body 350, 360, the overlap between the operating area of the electric accessory 93A and the operating area of the movable body 350, 360 is avoided.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the game in which the movable bodies 350 and 360 pass through the specific area SE while the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged in the retracted position by turning the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 sideways. Although the ball is suppressed from flowing into the entrance portions 332 and 342, in the configuration in which the entrance portions 332 and 342 are always open, it cannot be denied that an accidental entry of a ball may occur in the above state. Therefore, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 27 (a), the first shutter 370B that opens and closes the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 and the second shutter 380B that opens and closes the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341. When the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged in the retracted position, the shutters 370B and 380B prevent the balls from entering the ball entry portions 331 and 341. It is possible to avoid a large number of balls.

The shutters 370B and 380B can be moved to a protruding position protruding into the specific region SE through the slits 318B and 319B formed in the front surface portion 312B of the housing 310B and a retracting position where the protrusion is avoided. It is connected to the movable bodies 350 and 360 via the above. Hereinafter, the movement of the variable winning unit 83B will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (d). In FIGS. 27 (b) to 27 (d), for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350, 360 and the shutters 370B, 380B arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 27B, when both movable bodies 350 and 360 are waiting at the retracted position, both shutters 370B and 380B are waiting at the protruding position.

In the first winning mode, as shown in FIG. 27 (b) → FIG. 27 (c), the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the first shutter 370B interlocks with (synchronizes with) the first shutter 370B. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 332 via the first guide path GP1. When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position due to the satisfaction of the round end condition, the first shutter 370B moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronizing with) (FIG. 27 (c) → FIG. 27 (b)). As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is closed, and the ball cannot enter the entrance portion 332.

In the second winning mode, as shown in FIG. 27 (b) → FIG. 27 (d), the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the second shutter 380B interlocks with (synchronizes with) the second shutter 380B. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is opened, and the entry into the entrance portion 342 via the second guide path GP2 becomes possible. When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position due to the satisfaction of the round end condition, the second shutter 380B moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronizing with) (FIG. 27 (d) → FIG. 27 (b)). As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is closed, and entry into the entrance portion 342 becomes impossible.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 is inserted through the recessed portion 363 formed in the second movable body 360, so that the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are cross-arranged. It was realized. In such a configuration, the width of the recessed portion 363 becomes larger, so that the blank formed on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 becomes larger. As a result, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 is likely to be disturbed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28A, it is preferable to form a recess (groove portion 353C) in which the second movable body 360C is inserted in the portion of the lower surface 352C of the first movable body 350C that intersects with the second movable body 360C. As a result, the width of the recessed portion 363C formed in the first movable body 350C can be reduced. In order to embody such a technical idea, a configuration corresponding to the groove portion 353C may be arranged on the upper surface side of the first movable body 350C. However, in such a configuration, the rolling surface constituting the first guide path GP1 becomes uneven, which causes the behavior of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331 to be disturbed. That is, in forming the groove portion 353C not on the upper surface side but on the lower surface side, the rolling surface of the game ball in the second guide path GP2 is ensured while ensuring the smoothness of the rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide path GP1. It has the technical significance of being able to promote smoothing.

Incidentally, the target for forming the notch is not limited to the first movable body 350, but may be the second movable body 360. Further, when a notch is formed in the first movable body 350, a configuration corresponding to the groove portion 353C may be arranged in the second movable body 360.

<Modification example 4>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are crossed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the first movable body 350 is formed. It suffices if the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect with each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 28B, notches 353D and 363D are formed in both the first movable body 350D and the second movable body 360D, and the first movable body portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side. A gap may be formed between the 1 movable body 350D and the 2nd movable body 360D.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the second guide path 360 is arranged at a position overlapping with the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350, and the second guide path formed by the second movable body 360. The first movable body 350 is arranged at a position overlapping with GP2, but the present invention is not limited to this. A movable body that forms the other guide path may be arranged at a position that overlaps with at least one guide path. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 28 (c), the first movable body 350E may be arranged at a position overlapping with the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360E. In this case, it is not always necessary to intersect the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2.

<Modification 6>
In a configuration in which the specific area SE sandwiched between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 functions as an introduction area when the game ball flows into the ball entry sections 331 and 341, the specific area SE is used. It is covered from the front of the gaming machine by a cover portion or the like, and the visibility of the gaming ball passing behind the cover portion (specific area SE) and the visibility of the entrance portions 332, 342 and the movable bodies 350, 360 located behind the cover portion are reduced. It may be configured. Most of the game balls that have reached the specific region SE under the condition that the first guide path GP1 is formed flow into the first ball entry portion 331, and are specified under the situation that the second guide path GP2 is formed. Most of the game balls that have reached the region SE flow into the second ball entry portion 341. In view of these circumstances, is the gap (inflow port OE) between the first ball entry section 331 (detailed upper end) and the second ball entry section 341 (detailed upper end) an entrance to the variable winning device? It is preferable to give an impression like .. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect can be more preferably exhibited by lowering the visibility of the portion other than the gap (inlet OE) (entrance portion 332, 342, etc. of the ball entry portions 331, 341) by the above-mentioned cover portion. can. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 6, the variable winning unit 83 is located at the lower part of the game area PE, and is arranged so as to be lower than the height of the player's line of sight. Therefore, the player looks into the gap (inflow port OE) between the ball entry portions 331 and 341 from above, and even if the cover portion covers the entire specific region SE, the gap (inflow port OE) is formed by the cover portion. The visibility of the inflow port OE) is not obstructed.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are crossed by inserting the first movable body 350 into the recessed portion 363 formed in the second movable body 360. did. In such a configuration, the presence of the recessed portion 363 causes a blank on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360. If a game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 comes into contact with the edge of the recessed portion 363 when crossing this blank, the behavior of the game ball may be disturbed. This is advantageous in suppressing the monotonous movement of the game by giving a difference between the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry unit 331 and the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entry unit 341. .. However, if consideration is given to smoothing the movement of the game ball toward either the first ball entry section 331 or the second ball entry section 341 and promptly advancing the game, the blank may be made as small as possible. preferable. One of the features of this embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned device will be described with reference to FIG. 29, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 29 (a) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83F, and FIG. 29 (b) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83F.

The housing 310F of the variable winning unit 83F is formed with a core 390F projecting from the front surface portion 312F to the specific region SE. The core 390F is arranged at an intersection where the first movable body 350F (specifically, the first guide path GP1) and the second movable body 360F (specifically, the second guide path GP2) intersect.

In the first movable body 350F, a predetermined range including the front end portion is bifurcated by forming a notch 353F in a portion protruding to the specific region SE, and in addition to this, the first movable body 350F is formed in the front portion 312F. The slit 314F is also divided into two so as to be located on both the left and right sides of the core 390F. Similar to the first movable body 350F, the second movable body 360F also has a predetermined range including the front end portion bifurcated due to the formation of the recessed portion 363F in the portion protruding from the specific region SE. At the same time, the slit 314F formed on the front surface portion 312F is also divided into two so as to be located on both the left and right sides of the core 390F.

The core 390F is formed so as to have a diamond-shaped cross section, and a first inclined portion 391F having a downward inclination on the right side and a second inclined portion 392F having a downward inclination on the left side are provided on the upper surface portion thereof. The first inclined portion 391F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F, and the second inclined portion 392F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F.

As described above, when the core 390F is arranged in the specific region SE, the game ball passing through the specific region SE may hit the core 390F. There is a possibility that the game ball hitting the core 390F changes the moving direction and heads toward the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331 or the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a first shutter 370F that opens and closes the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 and a second shutter 380F that opens and closes the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 are provided and movable. When the bodies 350F and 360F are arranged in the evacuation position, the shutters 370F and 380F are configured to prevent the ball from entering each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 to avoid accidental ball entry. There is.

The shutters 370F and 380F can be moved to a protruding position protruding into the specific region SE through the slits 318F and 319F formed in the front surface portion 312F of the housing 310F and a retracting position where the protrusion is avoided, and the link mechanism. It is connected to the movable bodies 350F and 360F via the above.

Here, the movement of the variable winning unit 83F will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

In a state where the game ball is not guided to either the first ball entry section 331 or the second ball entry section 341 (initial state), both movable bodies 350F and 360F are retracted positions as shown in FIG. 30A. And both shutters 370F and 380F are waiting at the protruding position. As a result, it is impossible for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the ball entry portions 331 and 341.

In the first winning mode, as shown in FIG. 30A → FIG. 30B, the first movable body 350F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the first shutter 370F interlocks with (synchronizes with) the first shutter 370F. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is opened, and the ball can enter the entrance portion 332 via the first guide path GP1.

In the state where the first movable body 350F is arranged at the protruding position, the core 390F is inserted into the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and the blank on the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F is the first inclined portion of the core 390F. Complemented by 391F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces are formed by the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F and the first inclined portion 391F of the core 390F. In this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (first inclined portion 391F). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the first guide path GP1 and smoothly guide the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331.

In this state, the entire core 390F including the second inclined portion 392F is housed in the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and the protrusion to the first guide path GP1 side is avoided. As a result, the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first guide path GP1 is suppressed from being disturbed by being caught by the edge portion of the second inclined portion 392F.

When the first movable body 350F moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the first shutter 370F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronizing with) the first movable body 350F. As a result, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is closed, and entry into the entrance portion 332 is disabled (see FIG. 30 (b) → FIG. 30 (a)).

In the second winning mode, as shown in FIG. 30A → FIG. 30C, the second movable body 360F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the second shutter 380F interlocks with (synchronizes with) the second shutter 380F. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is opened, and the entry into the entrance portion 342 via the second guide path GP2 becomes possible.

In the state where the second movable body 360F is arranged at the protruding position, the core 390F is inserted into the recessed portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and the blank on the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F is the second inclination of the core 390F. Complemented by section 392F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces is formed by the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F and the second inclined portion 392F of the core 390F. In this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (second inclined portion 392F). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide path GP2 and smoothly guide the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331.

In this state, the entire core 390F including the first inclined portion 391F is housed in the recessed portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and the protrusion to the second guide path GP2 side is avoided. As a result, the behavior of the game ball flowing down the second guide path GP2 is suppressed from being disturbed by being caught by the edge portion of the second inclined portion 392F.

When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the second shutter 380F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction with (synchronizing with) the second movable body 360. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is closed, and entry into the entrance portion 342 becomes impossible.

By forming a notch in which the other can be inserted into either the first movable body or the second movable body, it is possible to realize the cross arrangement of the first movable body and the second movable body. However, in such a configuration, the width of the recess becomes large due to the influence of the thickness of the movable body and the intersection angle of both movable bodies. In consideration of such circumstances, it is not preferable that the restrictions on the thickness and the crossing angle of the movable body are strengthened. In this respect, if the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by using the cores 390F arranged at the intersections of the movable bodies 350F and 360F together as shown in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 350F and 360F are formed. It is possible to suitably relax the restrictions on the thickness and the crossing angle. As a result, a practically preferable configuration is realized.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable winning device that changes the probability of entering a ball, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game by strengthening the sharpness during guidance / non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) at the time of guidance is wide. However, if the movable body forming the guide path is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, the occupied area of the winning device becomes large. That is, when the receiving width of the game ball is increased to increase the number of game balls to be guided, the occupied area of the movable body becomes large. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F (corresponding to the “passage forming portion”) forming a part of one guide path is used to form a part of the other guide path. For example, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. This can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of arrangement of the variable winning unit 83F.

When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the movable bodies 350F, 360F and the core 390F, a gap such as a step is formed in the guide paths GP1 and GP2 due to the positional deviation between the movable bodies 350F, 360F and the core 390F. Occurs. Such a gap can be a factor that hinders smooth flow, such as catching a game ball. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the moving direction of each of the movable bodies 350F and 360F is matched with the protruding direction of the core 390F, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the misalignment of the movable bodies 350F and 360F is suppressed. can.

Further, when the game ball is sandwiched between the movable bodies 350F, 360F and the core 390F, the core 390F may be deformed such as distortion. In this regard, by devising the operating directions of the movable bodies 350F and 360F as shown in the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 350F and 360F move from the retracted position to the protruding position, the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F are used. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between and. By protecting the core 390F in this way, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of the game ball in the guide paths GP1 and GP2.

<Third embodiment>
In the second embodiment described above, a fixed core 390F is used to reduce the blank on the rolling surface. Here, when the core 390F is provided with a function of forming a rolling surface, the core 390F is deformed such as by distortion, so that the boundary between the core 390F and the movable bodies 350F and 360F is provided on the rolling surface. A step may occur in the portion. Considering that the core 390F is arranged in the specific region SE which is the passing region of the game ball, it is assumed that the chance of the game ball colliding with the core 390F increases. In order to suppress the deformation of the core 390F, it is effective to improve the strength of the core 390F, but in view of the fact that the core 390F is cantilevered, reinforcement at the root portion thereof is important. Under such circumstances, it is feared that the distance from the slits 318F and 319F located on both sides of the core 390F becomes large, and as a result, it becomes difficult to reduce the blank generated on the rolling surface.

One of the features of this embodiment is that measures are taken in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the countermeasure will be described with reference to FIG. 31, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment. 31 (a) is a perspective view showing the variable winning unit 83G, and FIG. 31 (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between the movable bodies 350G and 360G and the core 390G.

The core 390G is assembled to the housing 310G in a state where it can slide and move in the same direction (front-back direction) as the slide movement direction of the first movable body 350G and the second movable body 360G, and the front portion of the housing 310G is moved by sliding. The position is switched between a protruding position protruding from the 312G to the specific area SE and a retracted position in which the protrusion to the specific area SE is avoided.

A spring 396G is provided in the housing 310G as an urging means for urging the core 390G rearward, and the urging force of the spring 396G causes the core 390G to stand by in a retracted position.

An arm portion 355G is formed at the rear end portion of the first movable body 350G, and the arm portion 355G is in contact with the receiving portion 395G formed on the back surface of the core 390G from the rear. Similarly, an arm portion 365G is also formed at the rear end portion of the second movable body 360G, and the arm portion 365G is in contact with the receiving portion 395G of the core 390G from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 31 (1) → FIG. 31 (2), when the first movable body 350G slides from the retracted position to the protruding position, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G advances the receiving portion 395G. The core 390G moves forward against the urging force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the protruding position together with the first movable body 350G. As a result, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31 (a2)). When the round end condition is satisfied and the first movable body 350G moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the urging force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G functions as a stopper for preventing the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are synchronized.

When the core 390G is interlocked with the first movable body 350G, the core 390G moves away from the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G, and the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are not interlocked with each other.

As shown in FIG. 31 (1) → FIG. 31 (3), when the second movable body 360G slides from the retracted position to the protruding position, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G advances the receiving portion 395G. The core 390G moves forward against the urging force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the protruding position together with the second movable body 360G. As a result, the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31 (a3)). When the round end condition is satisfied and the second movable body 360G moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the urging force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G functions as a stopper for preventing the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are synchronized.

When the core 390G is interlocked with the second movable body 360G, the core 390G moves away from the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G, and the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are not interlocked with each other.

In this way, if the core 390G is movable, the core 390G will stand by at the retracted position in the initial state, and the protrusion to the specific region SE will be avoided. As a result, the chance of the game ball colliding with the core 390G can be reduced, and the core 390G can be protected.

In the state where the core 390G is arranged at the protruding position, the core 390G is sandwiched by either the first movable body 350G or the second movable body 360G. Therefore, even when a stress that deforms the core 390G is generated due to a collision of a game ball with the core 390G, the stress can be released to the movable bodies 350G and 360G. Further, since excessive deformation is regulated by the movable bodies 350G and 360G, concerns about plasticity and the like can be eliminated. For the above reasons, the influence of the strength decrease caused by the movable core 390G can be suitably mitigated.

Further, as shown in the second embodiment, when the fixed core 390F is arranged in the specific region SE, the flow direction of the game ball that has reached the specific region SE changes when it hits the core 390F. , There is a possibility of heading to the ball entry section 331,341. Therefore, in a situation where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed by the movable bodies 350F and 360F, the shutters 370F and 380F attached to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 accidentally enter the ball entry portions 331 and 341. Suppressed ball entry.

In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F stands by at the retracted position under the situation where the guidance to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is not performed, and the protrusion to the specific area SE is avoided. There is. Therefore, the rebound of the game ball as described above does not occur. For the above reasons, it is possible to suppress accidental entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341, even though the configuration corresponding to the shutters 370F and 380F is not provided.

Further, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed, the protrusion of the core 390G to the game area PE is suppressed, whereby the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the core 390G can be reduced. .. By protecting the core 390G in this way, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the core 390 and the movable bodies 350G and 360G, the relative positions of the two are scattered and the game ball is smoothly guided. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

When the core 390G is a haunting type, the core 390G moves to the protruding position following the movement of the movable bodies 350G and 360G to the protruding position, so that the formation timing of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 can be determined. It is possible to suppress deviation and the like.

As described above, if the core 390G is a haunting type, various effects such as protection of the core 390G can be expected. However, the fact that a drive unit for driving the core 390G is required separately hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the variable winning unit 83G. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the moving directions of the movable bodies 350G, 360G and the core 390G are unified, and the arm portions 355G, 365G (corresponding to the "acting part") provided in the movable bodies 350G, 360G. ), The core 390G is pushed to the protruding position, so that it is not necessary to add a new drive unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive complication of the configuration of the variable winning unit 83G and contribute to the miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83G.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment described above, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the guide destination of the game ball is the first entry portion 331, and in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the guide destination of the game ball is. Although it is configured to be the second ball entry section 341, a third winning mode may be provided in which the guide destinations are switched to the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 in a predetermined order (for example, alternately). In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to return the core 390F to the retracted position each time the guide destination is switched. For example, when the objects arranged at the protruding positions of the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F are exchanged, the core 390F is transferred between the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F, and the core It is also possible to have a configuration in which the 390F is maintained in the protruding position (a configuration in which the return to the retracted position is avoided).

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 stand by at the evacuation position under the situation where the game ball is not guided to the entry units 331 and 341. It was configured to be used. In the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are made to stand by at the protruding positions under the situation where the game ball is not guided to the entry portions 331 and 341. Therefore, in order to realize such a configuration, a part of the configuration has been changed from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. 32 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83H, FIG. 32 (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83H, and FIG. 32 (c) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit 83H.

In the initial state (non-guided state) in which the game ball is not guided to any of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the protruding positions as shown in FIG. 32. .. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 in the initial state is 0 °.

The output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) under the initial state, so that the first movable body 350H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. The output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) under the condition that the first movable body 350H is arranged in the retracted position, so that the first movable body 350H protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. In this way, when the first movable body 350H moves between the retracted position / the protruding position, the second movable body 360H is maintained at the protruding position.

The output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) under the initial state, so that the second movable body 360H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. The output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) under the condition that the second movable body 360H is arranged in the retracted position, so that the second movable body 360H is moved from the retracted position. Return to the protruding position. In this way, when the second movable body 360H moves between the retracted position / the protruding position, the first movable body 350H is maintained at the protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in a state where both movable bodies 350H and 360H are arranged at protruding positions, both movable bodies 350H, by the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H. A series of stage STs straddling 360H are formed, and the game ball can be temporarily stopped on the stage ST.

The portion constituting the stage ST on the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H is inclined downward toward the intersection, and the portion constituting the stage ST on the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H is also It is sloping down toward the intersection. That is, the stage ST is configured so that the central portion of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 in the parallel arrangement direction is the lowest. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the stage ST moves toward the central portion.

The right side portion and the left side portion of the stage ST are allowed to move the game ball across the central portion. That is, the game ball that has fallen to the first movable body 350H side moves to the second movable body 360H side, and the game ball that has fallen to the second movable body 360H side moves to the first movable body 350H side. Movement is allowed.

Here, the right side portion and the left side portion of the stage ST have the same inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane, and the total length thereof is also the same. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game ball that has reached one of the right side portion and the left side portion exceeds the central portion and flows out from the stage ST from the other side.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the housing 310H is formed with a connecting passage 317 for guiding the game ball mounted on the stage ST to the lower side of the stage ST. Specifically, the inflow port 317aH of the connecting passage 317H is formed in the portion (central portion) directly above the intersection of both movable bodies 350H and 360H at the front surface portion 312H of the housing 310H, and both movable bodies 350H, An outlet 317bH of the connecting passage 317H is formed in a portion directly below the intersection of 360H.

As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H are slightly inclined downward toward the front surface portion 312H side of the housing 310H. By this inclination, the game ball placed on the stage ST is guided to the inflow port 317aH of the connecting passage 317H. The angle of inclination to the rear is extremely smaller than the angle of inclination to the left and right, and it is suppressed that the inclination to the rear is a factor that hinders the movement of the game ball along the guide paths GP1 and GP2. There is.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the flow of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry unit 331 and the second ball entry unit 341 will be described. In FIG. 33, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the retracted position are displayed using broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 33A, in a state where both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the protruding positions (non-guided state or initial state), the first movable body 350H is composed of the first movable body 350H. The 1 guide path GP1 is fragmented by the second movable body 360H, and the second guide path GP2 composed of the second movable body 360H is fragmented by the first movable body 350H. As a result, the game ball cannot be guided to either the first ball entry section 331 or the second ball entry section 341. More specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 are covered by both movable bodies 350H and 360H from the central side of the specific region SE, and pass through the specific region SE. The entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is avoided. In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is separated from the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the connecting passage 317H.

In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, when the round start condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 33 (a) → FIG. 33 (b). As a result, the shredding of the first guide path GP1 by the second movable body 360H is released, and the first ball entry portion 331 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the first ball entry section 331 and flows into the first ball entry section 331. For example, the game ball staying on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG. 33A is also guided to the first ball entry unit 331.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360H returns from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 33 (b) → FIG. 33 (a). As a result, the first guide path GP1 is cut off again by the second movable body 360H, and the first ball entry portion 331 is closed. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the connecting passage 317H.

As described in detail above, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the first movable body 350H is maintained in the protruding position, and the second movable body 360H moves to the protruding position / retracted position as the round progresses. By repeating the above steps, the first variable winning device is switched between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Considering such circumstances, it can be said that the first variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of the first ball entry portion 331, the first movable body 350H, and the second movable body 360H.

In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, when the round start condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 33 (a) → FIG. 33 (c). As a result, the shredding of the second guide path GP2 by the first movable body 350H is released, and the second ball entry portion 341 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the second ball entry section 341 and flows into the second entry section 341. For example, the game ball staying on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG. 33A will also be guided to the second ball entry unit 341.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350H returns from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 33 (c) → FIG. 33 (a). As a result, the second guide path GP2 is cut off again by the first movable body 350H, and the second ball entry portion 341 is closed. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the connecting passage 317H.

As described in detail above, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the second movable body 360H is maintained in the protruding position, and the first movable body 350H moves to the protruding position / retracted position as the round progresses. By repeating the above steps, the first variable winning device is switched between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Considering such circumstances, it can be said that the second variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of the second ball entry portion 341, the first movable body 350H, and the second movable body 360H.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the game ball reached during the interval period does not immediately leave the variable winning unit 83H, but temporarily stays on the stage ST. Therefore, the game ball remaining on the stage ST when the guidance is restarted can be included in the guidance target to the entry units 331 and 341, and the spillage of the game ball can be reduced. In this way, by configuring the structure to increase the chances of entering the ball, it is possible to suppress irregular hitting such that the launch of the game ball is avoided according to the interval period, and to facilitate the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by combining the two movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the protruding positions, both the movable bodies 350H and 360H constituting the guiding means function as a shutter covering the ball entry portions 331 and 341. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent accidental ball entry into the ball entry units 331 and 341 under conditions such as when the game has not transitioned to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Since each of the movable bodies 350H and 360H serves as both a guiding means and a blocking means, it is possible to promote the simplification of the drive mechanism and the like, and to contribute to the improvement of the durability and the stability of the operation of the variable winning unit 83H.

When the first movable body 350H is arranged in the retracted position in the first movable body 350H described above, at least a part of the inflow port 317aH of the connecting passage 317H is blocked (covered) to the inflow port 317a. A blocking portion may be provided to prevent the inflow of the game ball. Similarly, when the second movable body 360H is arranged in the retracted position in the second movable body 360H, a game to the inflow port 317a is performed by blocking (covering) at least a part of the inflow port 317aH of the connecting passage 317H. A blocking portion may be provided to prevent the inflow of the ball. These blocking portions may be configured by, for example, standing portions that stand upward from the front end portions of the movable bodies 350H and 360H.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, it is specified that the guide destination of the game ball is one of the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 according to the type of jackpot, but in the present embodiment, it is predetermined. The guide destination of the game ball is switched in the order of the above, and the operation mode of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is changed from the first embodiment in order to realize such a movement. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 34 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit 83, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning portion and the number of prize balls, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of switching of guide destinations. Is.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the present embodiment, the drive unit 321a for the first movable body 350 and the drive unit 321b for the second movable body 360 are provided, respectively, and they are provided by the main control device 162. The movements of the drive units 321a and 321b can be individually controlled. As a result, the restrictions on the positional relationship between the movable bodies 350 and 360 are relaxed as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the privilege given to the player based on the entry into the first ball entry section 331 and the privilege given to the player based on the entry into the second entry section 341. The benefits given are the same (15). That is, there is no difference in the superiority or inferiority of the privilege depending on the guide destination of the game ball in the open / close execution mode.

As the jackpot result, a 16R probability variation jackpot result, an 8R probability variation jackpot result, and an 8R normal jackpot result are set. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), regardless of the jackpot result, the ball entry portion to be the guide destination of the game ball is switched in a predetermined order. Specifically, the guide destination is alternately switched between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341.

Next, the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 and 36.

(Status switching process of variable winning unit 83)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the state switching process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being guided to either the first ball entry unit 331 or the second ball entry unit 341. judge. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83. When the ball is not being guided to the ball entry portions 331 and 341, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is “0”. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S502, the main prize opening opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S503, this state switching process ends. If the value of the round number counter OC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC is "0", the process proceeds to step S504 and the guidance start process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the guidance start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is the first round (first round). If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602, and the first movable body 350 is positioned to protrude from the retracted position in order to form a flow path (first guide path GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331. Perform the process of moving to. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321a. As a result, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed in the specific region SE.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not the starting round is an even round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, a process of moving the first movable body 350 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the drive unit 321a.

If a negative determination is made in step S603, that is, if the starting round is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a process of moving the second movable body 360 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the drive unit 321b.

Returning to the description of FIG. 35 again, after executing the guidance start process of step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC, and "8" is set in the winning counter PC in the following step S506.

After executing the process of step S506, the guidance start command indicating that the guidance to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 has been started (the round has started) is set in step S507, and this state switching process is performed. finish.

Returning to the explanation of step S501, if an affirmative judgment is made in the step S501, that is, if it is determined that the guide to the first ball entry unit 331 or the second ball entry unit 341 is being guided, the process proceeds to step S508 and the timer It is determined whether or not the value of the counter TC is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC is not "0", the process proceeds to step S509, and whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 set as the guide destination. Is determined based on the detection signal from the detection sensors 334 and 344. If no prize has been won, this state switching process is terminated as it is.

If a prize has been won, the setting process of the prize command is executed in step S510. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 140, and the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, is changed by the winning command.

After executing the command setting process in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511. In step S511, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". If the value of the winning counter PC is not "0", the present state switching process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined in step S512 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or when an affirmative determination is made in step S508 (that is, when it is determined that the value of the timer counter TC is "0") , It means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, the guidance end process is executed in step S513.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the guidance end process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the round to be completed this time is the final round. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the 16th round, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot result or an 8R normal jackpot result, it is whether or not it is the end of the 8th round. To judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S702. In step S702, a process of moving the second movable body 360 from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the drive unit 321b. As a result, both the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 return to the retracted position, and the variable winning unit 83 returns to the initial state (non-guided state).

If a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the round ending this time is an even numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, a process of moving the first movable body 350 from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321a.

If a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if the round ending this time is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of moving the second movable body 360 from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321b.

As shown in FIG. 35, after executing the guidance end processing in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514 to execute the round number counter OC update processing. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not "0", the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1, and when the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the same round number counter OC is performed. Keep the value of "0".

After that, in step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516. In step S516, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC.

After executing the process of step S516, the guidance end command is set in step S517, and the present state switching process is terminated. This set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S515, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the round number counter OC is "0", the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM is set in the waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

Then, in step S519, after setting the ending command, the present state switching process ends. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the open / close execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Next, the movement of the variable winning unit 83 in the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are schematic views showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83 and the flow of the game ball.

At the timing of shifting to the open / close execution mode, the two movable bodies 350 and 360 are both arranged in the retracted position, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes through the specific area SE and heads for the out port 86 (FIG. FIG. 38 (a)). At the timing of ta1 after the opening effect is completed, that is, at the start timing of the first round, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 37. As a result, a first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed in the specific region SE, and the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepted state to the accepted state (see FIG. 38 (b)). ). In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific region SE rolls along the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and flows into the first ball entry portion 331.

At the timing of ta2 when the number of balls entered into the first ball entry unit 331 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit number) and the round end condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, the first guide path GP1 is cut off by the second movable body 360, and the first ball entry portion 331 is covered by the two movable bodies 350, 360 from the center side of the specific area SE, and the first variable winning device is received. The state is switched to the non-accepted state (see FIG. 38 (c)).

The second guide path GP2 is formed by moving the second movable body 360 to the protruding position, but since the second guide path GP2 is cut off at the intermediate position by the first movable body 350, a specific area is formed. It is avoided that the game ball that has reached the SE heads for the second entry portion 341. The game ball that has reached the specific region SE in this state is temporarily stopped at the stage ST formed by the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360.

That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval period between the rounds is restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and stays on the stage ST. In the present embodiment, the interval period is 2 sec, and the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec. Therefore, about three game balls will be accumulated in the stage ST during the interval period.

The total length of the stage ST is larger than three times the diameter of the game balls, and the number of game balls that can be stopped (maximum number of stored games) is larger than the maximum number of game balls that are launched during the interval period. Is also increasing.

At the timing of ta3 where the interval period has elapsed from the timing of ta2, that is, at the start timing of the second round, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the second variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38 (d)). As a result, the game balls remaining on the stage ST will head toward the second entry portion 341, and these game balls will flow into the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341.

The maximum storage amount of the game balls in the stage ST is smaller than the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, 4), and the game balls exceeding the maximum storage amount will be spilled to the side of the variable winning unit 83. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large number of benefits due to the occurrence of incoming balls exceeding the above-mentioned upper limit number.

At the timing of ta4 when the number of balls entering the second ball entry unit 341 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit number) and the round end condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, the second guide path GP2 is cut off by the first movable body 350, and the second ball entry portion 341 is covered by the two movable bodies 350, 360 from the center side of the specific area SE, and the second variable winning device is received. The state is switched to the non-accepted state (see FIG. 39 (e)).

The first guide path GP1 is formed by moving the first movable body 350 to the protruding position, but since the first guide path GP1 is cut off at the intermediate position by the second movable body 360, a specific area is formed. It is avoided that the game ball that has reached the SE heads for the first ball entry portion 331. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE in this state is temporarily stopped at the stage ST. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval period between the rounds is restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and stays on the stage ST.

At the timing of ta5 where the interval period has elapsed from the timing of ta4, that is, at the start timing of the third round, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepted state (see FIG. 38 (f)). As a result, the game balls remaining on the stage ST will head toward the first ball entry section 331, and the game balls will flow into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry section 331.

After that, the round game progresses by repeating the operations of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 so that the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341 alternately serve as guide destinations. .. Then, at the timing when the final round is completed, both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged in the retracted positions, and the guidance to the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 is completed (see FIG. 38 (g)). ..

In the present embodiment, the 8th round or the 16th round is set to be the final round, and the guide destination of the game ball in these final rounds is the second entry portion 341. That is, in the final round, the first movable body 350 is arranged in the retracted position and the second movable body 360 is arranged in the protruding position. At the end of the final round, the variable winning unit 83 is returned to the initial state by moving the second movable body 360 from the protruding position to the retracted position while keeping the first movable body 350 in the retracted position.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first movable body 350 that guides the game ball to the first ball entry section 331 functions as a stopper that regulates the movement of the game ball toward the second entry section 341, and guides the game ball to the second entry section 341. The second movable body 360 functions as a stopper for restricting the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the movement of the variable winning unit 83 and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game in the open / close execution mode.

In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, the game is disliked that the game ball launched during the interval period does not enter the entry part and becomes a spilling ball (that is, investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from firing the ball may be made. Considering that the entry into the ball entry section triggers the progress of the game, it is feared that such a delayed action hinders the smooth progress of the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the specific area SE from passing through the specific area SE as it is during the interval period, and then the first ball entry unit 331 or the second entry unit 331 or the second entry. The game balls are stored until the guidance to the ball portion 341 is resumed. By suppressing the generation of waste balls in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to continue firing the game balls, and it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game.

When a plurality of game balls are staying on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into the ball entry portion to be the guide destination at once as the guidance is resumed. By diversifying the movement of the game ball toward the entry portion (one by one or a group of a plurality of balls), it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball.

The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the game ball can be stopped on both the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360. There is. If both the movable bodies 350 and 360 form a stationary surface in this way, the number of game balls that can be stationary (storable) at the stage ST can be increased while suppressing the increase in size of the variable winning unit 83. ..

The stage ST is configured to have a downward slope in the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST are accumulated in order from the position closer to the center. When the left and right ball entry sections 331 and 341 are used together, the game balls are preferentially stored at the position closer to the center, so that the next guide destination is the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section. Regardless of which of the portions 341, it is possible to suppress the slow flow of the game ball toward the entry portions 331 and 341. Incidentally, the configuration in which the stage ST is recessed in the central portion is a device for increasing the number of game balls that can be stopped while suppressing the expansion of the width of the stage ST.

The stationary game ball can be moved between the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the monotonic movement of the game ball that has reached the stage ST is suppressed.

When the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guided state to the first guided state, not only the game ball parked on the first movable body 350 but also the game ball parked on the second movable body 360. Is also guided to the first ball entry section 331. Specifically, when the second movable body 360 moves to the evacuation position, the game ball stopped on the second movable body 360 loses support and falls, but the first movable body 350 falls at the falling destination. Since (the right half) is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the first ball entry portion 331 together with the game balls stopped on the first movable body 350. Further, when the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guided state to the second guided state, the game stopped not only on the game ball parked on the second movable body 360 but also on the first movable body 350. The ball is also guided to the second ball entry section 341. Specifically, when the first movable body 350 moves to the evacuation position, the game ball stopped on the first movable body 350 loses support and falls, but the second movable body 360 falls at the falling destination. Since (the left half) is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the second entry portion 341 together with the game balls stopped on the second movable body 360. In this way, by setting the guide target regardless of which movable body 350 or 360 is stopped, it is possible to suppress the spillage of the game ball and preferably increase the above-mentioned entry opportunity. Further, increasing the number of game balls to be guided is a configuration in which diversification of ball entry modes into each entry section 331, 341 (for example, a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided to the entry sections 331, 341). ) Can be suitably realized.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game balls staying at the stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered in each round. Therefore, even if the player has the above-mentioned relief function, it is possible to suitably suppress the excessive privilege given to the player by the stopping function.

By configuring the stage ST to be formed over the two guide paths GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the player from having a wide area of attention due to the presence of the stage ST. This is a preferable configuration for improving the degree of attention to the game ball while it is stationary.

In the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83 alternately switches between the first guide state and the second guide state with the non-guidance state in between. Therefore, the game ball that did not enter one of the entry sections is guided to the other entry section via a stop. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83 is provided with two states in which the inflow of the game ball into both the entering ball portions 331 and 341 is prevented. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 39 (g), a state in which the game ball passes through the specific area SE by arranging both the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the retracted position, and the figure. As shown in 38 (c) and FIG. 39 (e), the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the protruding positions, so that the passage of the specific region SE is prohibited. Of these two states, the latter is a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific region SE can later flow into the ball entry portions 331 and 341, which is slightly more advantageous to the player than the former. As described above, by providing a plurality of states for blocking the inflow, it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the game.

It should be noted that, on the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 shown in the fifth embodiment, a deceleration portion (reducing portion: for example, a plurality of irregularities arranged in the guiding direction) for reducing the flow speed of the game ball). May be provided. More specifically, the deceleration portion (reduction) is located on at least one of the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 on the upstream side (upper side) of the intersection of both movable bodies 350 and 360. A force section) may be provided. In this case, for example, if a difference between advantages and disadvantages is set in the benefits and the like given to the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341, the entry ball on the disadvantage side of both movable bodies 350 and 360 is set. By providing the deceleration section on one side that guides the game ball to the section, the game ball guided to the entry section on the disadvantage side tends to have an opportunity to change the flow destination to the entry section on the advantageous side. It can contribute to further improvement of attention to.

In particular, if the deceleration unit is provided on one of the movable bodies 350 and 360, even if the interval period between rounds is constant, the first guide state may be switched to the second guide state. It is possible to make a difference in the spillage (in other words, the ball entry rate) of the game ball between the case of switching from the second guide state to the first guide state, and further diversification of the game can be realized by a simple configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the first movable body 350 constituting the guiding means to the first ball entering portion 331 and the second movable body 360 constituting the guiding means to the second ball entering portion 341 intersect. It was configured to be used. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the movable bodies 350I and 360I and the configuration related thereto are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration of the variable winning unit 83I in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. 40 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83I, FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) are schematic views showing the movement of the variable winning unit 83I, and FIG. 40 (d) is a schematic view showing another variable winning unit 83Y. .. In FIG. 40, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350I and 360I arranged at the retracted position are displayed using broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the specific region SE between the first ball entry section 331I and the second ball entry section 341I, the first as a guiding means for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section 331I. A movable body 350I and a second movable body 360I as a guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion 341 are arranged. These movable bodies 350I and 360I can slide and move in the front-rear direction, and move to a protruding position protruding into the specific area SE and a retracted position in which the protrusion to the specific area SE is suppressed according to the game situation.

Both the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I have a substantially plate shape, and are arranged so that one plate surface faces upward. The upper surface 351I of the first movable body 350I is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331, and by arranging the first movable body 350I at the protruding position, the game ball is first entered into the specific area SE. The first guide path GP1 for guiding to the portion 331I is formed (see FIG. 40 (b)). The upper surface 361I of the second movable body 360I is inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion 341I, and by arranging the second movable body 360I at the protruding position, the game ball is second-entered in the specific area SE. A second guide path GP2 that guides the unit 341I is formed (see FIG. 40 (b)).

The first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. Specifically, the height positions of the first ball entry section 331I and the second ball entry section 341I are displaced so that the former is slightly above the latter, and the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I Is arranged vertically so that the first movable body 350I is on the upper side and the second movable body 360I is on the lower side.

The first movable body 350I is arranged at a position overlapping the second guide path GP2 in the front-rear direction, and the operating region of the first movable body 350I and the second guide path GP2 partially overlap each other. In arranging the two movable bodies so as to be arranged vertically, as illustrated in FIG. 40 (d), the movable bodies 350Y and 360Y are arranged so as to avoid duplication of the guide paths as described above. It is also possible to place them away. However, in such a configuration, the vertical width dimension L4 of the variable winning unit 83Y tends to be large. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the operating region of the first movable body 350I is overlapped with the second guide path GP2 by the second movable body 360I, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83I is reduced. Therefore, the miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83I can be promoted.

<Modification 1>
When the first entry section 331J and the second entry section 341J are arranged so that the entrance portions 332J and 342J face each other, the height position of the first entry section 331J and the second entry section By providing a difference from the height position of 341J, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that the game ball that bounces off the lower entry portion will head toward the entrance portion of the upper entry portion. This is a factor that increases the probability of accidental ball entry described above. Here, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41 (a), if the first shutter 370J that opens and closes the first ball entry section 331J and the second shutter 380J that opens and closes the second ball entry section 341J are used in combination. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Since the shutters 370J and 380J are the same as the shutters 370B and 380B described in the second modification of the first embodiment, the description of the specific structure and operation will be omitted.

<Modification 2>
As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 41 (b), an upright portion 367K that stands up upward is provided at the end of the second movable body 360K on the side of the first ball entry portion 331K, and the second movable body 360K is arranged at a protruding position. In this state, the standing portion 367K faces the entrance portion 332K of the first ball entry portion 331K from the specific area SE side, and the configuration is such that the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 332K of the first ball entry portion 331K is prevented. It is also possible to.

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the first movable body 350I for the first ball entry portion 331I is arranged vertically on the upper side and the second movable body 360I for the second ball entry portion 341I is arranged on the lower side. The configuration is not limited to this, and the vertical positional relationship may be arbitrarily changed. For example, when the height position is shifted so that the first ball entry portion is lower than the second ball entry portion, they are arranged so that the second movable body is on the upper side and the first movable body is on the upper side. Both movable bodies should be installed side by side.

<7th embodiment>
In the first embodiment or the like, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are slid back and forth to switch the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device into an accepted state / a non-accepted state (variable winning unit 83). Is switched to the non-guidance state / first guidance state / second guidance state). In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for switching the variable winning device into the accepted state / the non-accepted state is different from the first embodiment and the like. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83L in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83L, and FIG. 42 (b) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83L. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the variable winning unit 83L has a first guide unit 400L that guides the game ball to the first ball entry unit 331 and a second guide that guides the game ball to the second ball entry unit 341. The first guide portion 400L forms the first guide path GP1 in the specific region SE, and the second guide portion 410L forms the second guide path GP2 in the specific region SE. , The configuration is consistent with the first embodiment.

The first guide portion 400L is composed of an upper left movable plate 401L constituting an upstream portion of the first guide path GP1 and a lower right movable plate 402L constituting a downstream portion of the first guide path GP1. The upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L have a flat plate shape, and both movable plates 401L. The 402L is arranged so as to be located on the same plane.

The upper left movable plate 401L can be slid and moved in the front-rear direction, and the position is switched between a protruding position protruding into the specific area SE and a retracted position in which protrusion to the specific area SE is suppressed by the sliding movement. On the other hand, the lower right movable plate 402L can slide and move in parallel with the front surface of the game board 80a (specifically, in the diagonal direction), and the position is close to the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper left movable plate. It switches to a separation position where a gap through which the game ball can pass is created between the 401L and the ball. The lower right movable plate 402L is maintained in a state of projecting to the specific region SE in the entire range from the proximity position to the separation position.

The second guide portion 410L is composed of an upper right movable plate 411L constituting an upstream portion of the second guide path GP2 and a lower left movable plate 412L constituting a downstream portion of the second guide path GP2. The upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L have a flat plate shape, and both movable plates 411L. 412L is arranged so as to be located on the same plane.

The upper right movable plate 411L can be slid and moved in the front-rear direction, and the position is switched between a protruding position protruding into the specific area SE and a retracted position in which protrusion to the specific area SE is suppressed by the sliding movement. On the other hand, the lower left movable plate 412L can be slid and moved in parallel with the front surface of the game board 80a (specifically, in the diagonal direction), and the position is close to the upper right movable plate 411L and the upper right movable plate 411L. It switches to a separation position where a gap through which the game ball can pass is created. The lower left movable plate 412L is maintained in a state of projecting to the specific region SE in the entire range from the proximity position to the separation position.

The first variable winning device in the present embodiment is composed of a first ball entry portion 331, an upper left movable plate 401L, a lower right movable plate 402L, an upper right movable plate 411L, and the like, and the second variable winning device is It is composed of a second ball entry portion 341, an upper right movable plate 411L, a lower left movable plate 412L, an upper left movable plate 401L, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 42B, the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide portion 400L and the upper right movable plate 411L constituting the second guide portion 410L are connected to the drive portion 321c via the link mechanism 325c. ing. The drive unit 321c is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. Regarding the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the separated position to the proximity position slightly precedes the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the retracted position → the upper right to the protruding position. The operation timing is different so that the movement of the movable plate 411L slightly precedes the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position to the separated position. In other words, in the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the distance position to the proximity position is slightly slower than the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the movement from the proximity position to the separation position. It has a delay mechanism that delays the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the retracted position to the protruding position so that the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L is delayed.

The upper left movable plate 401L constituting the first guide portion 400L and the lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide portion 410L are connected to the drive unit 321d via the link mechanism 325d. The drive unit 321d is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. Regarding the link mechanism 325dL, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the separated position to the close position slightly precedes the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the upper left movable from the retracted position to the protruding position. The operation timing is different so that the movement of the plate 401L slightly precedes the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the proximity position to the separation position. In other words, in the link mechanism 325dL, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the separated position to the close position is slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the movement from the close position to the separated position. It has a delay mechanism that delays the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L so that it is slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 43, the state change of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of the game ball will be described. In FIG. 43, for convenience of explanation, the movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the retracted position are displayed using broken lines.

When the variable winning unit 83L is in the initial state of being in the non-accepting state (both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in the non-accepting state), the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are in the protruding positions. The lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are arranged at separate positions. In this state, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is covered from the center side of the specific region SE by the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower right movable plate 402L, and the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 is covered. It is covered from the center side of the specific area SE by the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower left movable plate 412L. That is, both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in the non-accepting state, and the gaming ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341. Is not possible.

In this state, a passing portion 420L through which the game ball can pass is formed between the movable plates 401L and 412L on the left side and the movable plates 402L and 411L on the right side (central portion of the specific area SE). The game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes through the passing portion 420L and heads for the out port 86.

The upper left movable plate 401L constitutes the wall surface (left wall surface) of the passing portion 420L, and the lower left movable plate 412L constitutes the wall surface (left wall surface) of the passing portion 420L. A gap (moving gap of the lower left movable plate 412L) is formed between the right end portion). Further, the upper right movable plate 411L constitutes the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passing portion 420L, and the lower right movable plate 402L constitutes the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passing portion 420L. A gap (moving gap of the lower right movable plate 402L) is formed between the end portion (left end portion) and the end portion (left end portion). These gaps are smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and it is avoided that the game ball heads toward the inlet portions 332 and 342 of the respective entry portions 331 and 341 through the gap.

When the game shifts to the open / close execution mode and the game ball should be guided to the first ball entry unit 331, the first variable winning device switches from the non-receipt state to the acceptance state (the variable winning unit 83L is not). Switch from the guidance state to the first guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (a) → FIG. 43 (b), the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position, and the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate are moved. The 402L forms a series of first guide paths GP1 that are inclined downward to the first ball entry portion 331. In line with this, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retracts) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is opened.

As described above, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L forming the first guide path GP1 precedes the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is restricted before the timing at which the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331 is permitted. In this way, the game ball heading toward the out port 86 through the passing portion 420L is placed on the lower right movable plate 402L, so that the game ball that should have originally spilled is made by the lower right movable plate 402L. You can make it look as if you were rescued.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the first variable winning device switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state (the variable winning unit 83L switches from the first guided state to the non-guided state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (b) → FIG. 43 (a), the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the first guide path GP1 is cut off. In line with this, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (descends) from the proximity position to the separation position, and the guidance function by the first guide path GP1 is canceled.

As described above, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter precedes the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L that forms the first guide path GP1. Specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is covered by the upper right movable plate 411L in a state where the first guide path GP1 is formed (a state in which the inflow to the passing portion 420L is restricted). .. The lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide path GP1 can guide the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 even when the lower right movable plate 402L is not arranged at a close position. Therefore, by preceding the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball entry (excessive ball entry) after the round end condition is satisfied.

Further, unlike the case of switching from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L precedes, so that it is possible to differentiate from the movement when switching from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. This is also advantageous in making the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L when switching from the non-accepted state to the accepted state stand out.

When the game shifts to the open / close execution mode and the game ball should be guided to the second ball entry unit 341, the second variable winning device switches from the non-receipt state to the acceptance state (the variable winning unit 83L is not). Switch from the guidance state to the second guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (a) → FIG. 43 (c), the lower left movable plate 412L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position, and is moved by the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L. A series of second guide paths GP2 having a downward slope to the second ball entry portion 341 are formed. In line with this, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retracts) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is opened.

As described above, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L forming the second guide path GP2 is configured to precede the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is restricted before the timing at which the movement of the game ball toward the second entry portion 341 is permitted. In this way, the game ball heading toward the out port 86 through the passing portion 420L is placed on the lower left movable plate 412L, so that the game ball that should have spilled is rescued by the lower left movable plate 412L. You can make it look as if it were.

When the round end condition is satisfied, the second variable winning device switches from the accepted state to the non-accepted state (the variable winning unit 83L switches from the second guided state to the non-guided state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (c) → FIG. 43 (a), the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the second guide path GP2 is cut off. In line with this, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (descends) from the proximity position to the separation position, and the guidance function by the second guide path GP2 is canceled.

As described above, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter precedes the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L that forms the second guide path GP2. Specifically, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is covered by the upper left movable plate 401L in a state where the second guide path GP2 is formed (a state in which the inflow to the passing portion 420L is restricted). .. The lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide path GP2 can guide the game ball to the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 even if it is not arranged at a close position. Therefore, by preceding the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball entry (excessive ball entry) after the round end condition is satisfied.

Further, unlike the case of switching from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L precedes, so that it is possible to differentiate from the movement when switching from the non-accepted state to the accepted state. This is also advantageous in making the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L when switching from the non-accepted state to the accepted state stand out.

In the seventh embodiment described in detail above, the operating region of the lower right movable plate 402L and the operating region of the lower left movable plate 412L partially overlap. In this way, if the operation areas are overlapped, the variable winning unit is used to increase the total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 and increase the ratio of the game balls guided to the respective entry portions 331 and 341. It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of 83L.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable winning device that changes the probability of entering a ball by a guiding means, the monotonicity of the game is suppressed by strengthening the sharpness of the guided / non-guided state. can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, if the size of the guiding means is simply increased, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when switching states are likely to occur. Therefore, for example, as shown in the first guide portion 400L of the present embodiment, a series of first guide paths are taken by using a plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L in combination and arranging the movable plates 401L and 402L at the passage forming position. If the GP1 is formed, it is possible to avoid increasing the size of each movable plate. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the improvement.

Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry portions 331 and 341 depends on the lower movable plates 402L and 412L forming the downstream portion. That is, even if the game ball moves along the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage forming position (protruding position), the lower movable plates 402L and 412L are arranged at the passage forming position (proximity position). If not, the guidance to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is not performed well. In such a configuration, the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L to the passage forming position (proximity position) is delayed from the arrangement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to the passage forming position (protruding position). By doing so, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L.

Regarding the upper movable plates 401L and 411L forming the upstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, it is necessary for the game ball that has reached the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to pass the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to some extent. A period is required. Therefore, if the passage forming position (protruding position) of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L is closer to the rear of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage forming position (protruding position), the upper side is configured. It is possible to generate a branch as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the movable plates 401L and 411L is successfully transferred to the lower movable plates 402L and 412L, and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, since the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed prior to the opening of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, it is as if the game balls that reached the guide paths GP1 and GP2 prior to the opening were avoided from spilling. It is possible to give a good impression to the player. By relieving the spilled ball in this way, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the launching operation of the gaming ball by waiting for the opening of the entry portions 331 and 341, and promote the continuation of the launching of the gaming ball. be able to. This is preferable in suppressing the delay in the progress of the game. In addition, the fairness of the game can be suitably improved by suppressing the difference in the obtained benefits and the like according to the skill of the player.

The movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L (corresponding to the "passage forming portion") from the separated position (passage non-forming position) to the proximity position (passage forming position) is allowed from the restricted position (protruding position) to the allowable position (evacuation position). ), The movement of the upper movable plates 402L, 412L is delayed from the movement of the lower movable plates 402L, 412L in the configuration preceding the movement of the upper movable plates 402L, 412L (corresponding to the "regulatory part"). However, there is a possibility that the player may be given the impression that he / she has missed the opportunity to enter the ball due to the spilling of the game ball that should have entered the ball. This is expected to hinder the exertion of the various effects described above.

Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the game balls that have fallen to the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating portion while the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are being formed are guided to the guide paths GP1 and GP2 side. With this configuration, it is possible to give the game ball an opportunity to enter the ball. Therefore, it gives the impression that the movement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating part is delayed from the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L as the flow path forming part, which is a factor to miss the ball entry opportunity. It can be made difficult, and it can be suitably suppressed as a factor that lowers the player's willingness to play.

Assuming that the movement of the game ball is restricted at a position close to the ball entry portion 331, 341, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portion are being regulated as soon as they move to the evacuation position. It is feared that the game ball will flow into the ball entry portions 331 and 341, making it difficult to visually confirm the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the game ball guided to the guide paths GP1 and GP2 side by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portion is configured to be kept away from the ball entry portions 331 and 341 which are the guide destinations. For example, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

As described above, in the configuration in which the formation of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is preceded, a plurality of game balls blocked by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulation part are suddenly entered into the ball entry part 331 as the regulation is lifted. , 341 can flow into. Such movement of the game ball is preferable in enhancing the visual impact. Here, as shown in the embodiment, if the regulation unit interrupts the intermediate position of the guidance paths GP1 and GP2, and the guidance paths GP1 and GP2 extend downstream from the regulation point, the above description is made. When such a movement of the game ball occurs, the movement distance of the game ball group can be increased, and the chance that the movement of the game ball is overlooked can be reduced.

In the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the passage length of the portion located upstream of the restricted position by the upper movable plate 401L and 411L as the regulating portion is longer than the radial dimension of the game ball, and the upper movable plate 401L, The game ball whose movement to the entry portions 331 and 341 is hindered by the 411L can stand by in the upstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Therefore, after the regulation is lifted, the game balls located on the guide paths GP1 and GP2 will promptly head toward the ball entry portions 331 and 341, which can contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

In particular, immediately after the deregulation, give a difference in density to the game balls that enter so that the degree of density of the game balls toward the entry portions 331 and 341 is lower than the timing when a certain period has passed since the deregulation. Can be done. This is preferable in order to prevent the movement of the game ball toward the ball entry portions 331 and 341 from becoming monotonous.

When the variable winning unit 83L is switched to the guidance state, it has the above-mentioned various technical significances to release the movement restriction by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L after forming the guidance paths GP1 and GP2. However, if the movement of the variable winning unit 83L becomes complicated, there is a concern that the operation period will be extended and the responsiveness when switching between the guided state and the non-guided state will decrease. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched to the guided state, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the regulating unit are arranged in the regulated position in advance. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In the configuration in which the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the displacement of the movable plates 402L and 412L, the operating area of the movable plates 402L and 412L becomes a dead space in which other gaming parts cannot be arranged or is difficult. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the operating area of the movable plate 402L when the first variable winning device is in the receiving state and the operating area of the movable plate 412L when the second variable winning device is in the receiving state are If the configuration is partially overlapped, even when a plurality of variable ball entry devices are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the wasteful increase of dead space.

<8th embodiment>
As shown in the seventh embodiment, in the configuration in which the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during non-guidance heads toward the out port 86 through the passing portion 420L, the passing frequency of the game ball in the passing portion 420L is high. Is expected to be. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a device for smoothing the flow of the game ball in the passing portion 420L is provided. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83M in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment. 44 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83M, and FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c) are schematic views showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83M and the flow of the game ball. In FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c), the movable plate arranged at the retracted position is indicated by a broken line for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the upper left movable plate 401M constituting the first guide portion 400M and the upper right movable plate 411M constituting the second guide portion 410M have a downstream end portion of the main body portion inclined obliquely. Flange portions 405M and 415M bent in the vertical direction are formed from the above. The flange portions 405M and 415M face each other with a gap larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, and the flange portions 405M and 415M form a wall surface of the passing portion 420M.

Some of the game balls flowing into the passing portion 420M pass through the upper right movable plate 411M and some pass through the upper left movable plate 401M. Therefore, by widening the passage width of the passing portion 420M, ball clogging or the like may occur. Can be suppressed. Further, the passage wall surface is formed by the flange portions 405M and 415M to smooth the passage wall surface of the passage portion 420M. As a result, the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball when passing through the passing portion 420M is alleviated, and the variable winning unit 83M suppresses the flow of the game ball from becoming stagnant.

When the lower movable plates 402M and 412M are arranged at separated positions, protrusion of the end portions of the movable plates 402M and 412M to the passing portion 420M beyond the flange portions 405M and 415M is avoided. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the first variable winning device is in the accepting state, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M. The flange portion 405M (see FIG. 44A) is located on the extension of the operating area of the lower right movable plate 402M, and the upper surface of the lower right movable plate 402M is relative to the virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper left movable plate 401M. It is offset downward. Therefore, the first guide path GP1 in the present embodiment has a step at an intermediate position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the second variable winning device is in the accepting state, the second guide path GP2 is formed by the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M. The flange portion 415M (see FIG. 44 (a)) is located on the extension of the operating area of the lower left movable plate 412M, and the upper surface of the lower left movable plate 412M is on the lower side with respect to the virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper right movable plate 411M. Is offset to. Therefore, the second guide path GP2 in the present embodiment has a step in the middle position.

As described above, when the flow of the game ball in the passing portion 420M is smoothed by using the flange portions 405M and 415M, the operating area of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M is limited by the flange portions 405M and 415M. .. Therefore, such a restriction is overcome by forming a step at an intermediate position of the guide paths GP1 and GP2.

Here, increasing the width of the passing portion 420M is advantageous in facilitating the flow of the game ball. However, in such a configuration, the slide strokes of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M become a factor to increase. In the present embodiment, by providing the above-mentioned step, the gap generated between the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M and the gap generated between the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M are increased to some extent. Is possible. This prevents the slide stroke from becoming excessively large. More specifically, the operating area of the lower right movable plate 402M is secured by using the area directly under the first ball entry portion 331, and the operating area of the lower left movable plate 412M is directly under the second ball entry portion 341. It is secured by using. As described above, it is preferable to have a configuration that suppresses an increase in the slide stroke in order to suppress lateral protrusion of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M and to realize miniaturization of the entire variable winning unit 83M.

Further, it is advantageous to use a plurality of movable bodies in combination to switch between the guided state and the non-guided state in order to improve the degree of attention to the variable winning unit. However, in such a configuration, when the movement of any of the movable bodies is incomplete, the guidance function cannot be exerted well. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in the reliability of the variable winning unit.

In the present embodiment, the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M are combined to form the first guide path GP1, and the game ball passing through the first guide path GP1 passes through the upper right movable plate 411M. Dodge and flow into the first ball entry portion 331. In such a configuration, if the first guide path GP1 is not formed well even though the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted to the retracted position and the first ball entry portion 331 is opened, the first It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry section 331.

For example, when a game ball is sandwiched between the lower right movable plate 402M and the upper left movable plate 401M and the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered, the first guide path GP1 is not formed well. It increases the chances that the player will miss the benefits that he or she should have.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by providing a step in the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), a game ball is formed between the lower right movable plate 402M and the flange portion 405M of the upper left movable plate 401M in the process of moving the lower right movable plate 402M to a close position. When B1 is pinched, the game ball B1 is pushed upward or downward and is separated from the operating region of the lower right movable plate 402M. Here, even if the game ball B1 is caught and the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered from moving to a close position, the game ball B1 complements the lower surface of the first guide path GP1. It becomes. Although the game ball is convex upward, the amount of protrusion thereof is reduced by the step, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball B1 from becoming an obstacle that obstructs the flow of the subsequent game ball B2. In this way, even if the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered, as long as the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted, the inflow to the first ball entry portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 will occur. If it is allowed, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<9th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the variable winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment is changed, and a device is made to promote the continuation of the launching operation of the game ball as in the fifth embodiment. It is one of the features that it is. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned device will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a), focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 45 (a) is a schematic view showing a transmission path of a driving force.

As shown in FIG. 45A, in the variable winning unit 83L shown in the present embodiment, the first driving unit 321eL for the first guide unit 400L and the second guide are used as the power unit in the variable winning unit 83L. A second drive unit 321 fL for the unit 410 L is provided. The first drive unit 321eL is connected to the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide unit 400L via a link mechanism 325eL, and the second drive unit 321fL constitutes the second guide unit 410L. It is connected to the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L via a link mechanism 325fL.

The drive units 321eL and 321fL are stepping motors, and the output shaft rotates in the first specific direction (for example, clockwise direction) and the second specific direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. It works as if it were. As a result, the arrangement of the movable plates 401L, 402L, 411L, and 412L to be driven is individually changed.

Specifically, the upper left movable plate 401L constituting the first guide unit 400L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position by rotating the output shaft of the first driving unit 321eL from the initial position to the first specific direction. .. When the upper left movable plate 401L is arranged in the retracted position, the output shaft of the first drive unit 321eL rotates in the second specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the upper left movable plate 401L protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper left movable plate 401L is operated in this way, the lower right movable plate 402L remains on standby at the separated position.

The lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide unit 400L moves from the separated position to the close position by rotating the output shaft of the first drive unit 321eL in the second specific direction from the initial position. Then, when the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged at the close position, the first drive unit 321eL rotates in the first specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the close position. Return to the separated position. When the lower right movable plate 402L is operated in this way, the upper left movable plate 401L remains on standby at the protruding position.

The upper right movable plate 411L constituting the second guide unit 410L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position by rotating the output shaft of the second driving unit 321fL from the initial position to the second specific direction. When the upper left movable plate 401L is arranged in the retracted position, the output shaft of the second drive unit 321 fL rotates in the first specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the upper right movable plate 411L protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper right movable plate 411L is operated in this way, the lower left movable plate 412L remains on standby at the separated position.

The lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide unit 410L moves from the separated position to the close position by rotating the output shaft of the second drive unit 321 fL in the first specific direction from the initial position. Then, when the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged at a close position, the second drive unit 321 fL rotates in the second specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the lower left movable plate 412L is separated from the close position. Return to. When the lower left movable plate 412L is operated in this way, the upper right movable plate 411L remains on standby at the protruding position.

Regarding the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83L in the present embodiment, the main flow is the same as the state switching process (see FIG. 35) shown in the fifth embodiment, but the guidance start processing and the guidance The details of the termination process are different from the state switching process shown in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the guidance start processing and the guidance end processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c).

As shown in FIG. 45B, in the guidance start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the round to be started this time is the first round (first round). If an affirmative judgment is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802, and the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the separated position to the close position in order to form a flow path (first guide path GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331. Performs the process of moving (raising) to. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the proximity position is output to the first drive unit 321eL.

After executing the process of step S802, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, a process of moving (retracting) the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracting position is performed in order to open the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL.

In addition, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to the retracted position is delayed with respect to the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the close position, and the first guide precedes the opening of the first ball entry portion 331. Path GP1 is formed.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether or not the starting round is an even round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, a process of moving (retracting) the upper left movable plate 401L from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed in order to open the second ball entry portion 341. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the first drive unit 321eL.

Returning to the description of step S804, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the starting round is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a process of moving (retracting) the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracting position is performed in order to open the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL.

Next, the guidance end processing will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (c). In the guidance end process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the round to be completed this time is the final round. Specifically, if the opening / closing execution mode this time corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is determined whether or not the 16th round is over, and the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 8R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the result, it is determined whether or not the eighth round is over.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, a process of moving (advancing) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed in order to close the second ball entry portion 341. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the first drive unit 321eL. After executing the process of step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, in order to release the guidance of the game ball by the second guide path GP2, the lower left movable plate 412L is moved (descended) from the close position to the separated position. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the separated position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL.

When the upper left movable plate 401L returns to the protruding position and the lower left movable plate 412L returns to the separated position, the variable winning unit 83L returns to the initial state.

Returning to the description of step S901, if a negative determination is made in the step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the round ending this time is an even numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, a process of moving (advancing) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed in order to close the second ball entry portion 341. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the first drive unit 321eL. After executing the process of step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

In step S906, the flow path in the specific region SE is switched from the second guide path GP2 that guides the game ball to the second entry portion 341 to the first guide path GP1 that guides the game ball to the first entry portion 331. Performs road switching processing. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the lower left movable plate 412L from the close position to the close position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL, and the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the close position to the close position. A drive signal for moving the proximity position is output to the first drive unit 321eL.

Returning to the description of step S904, if a negative determination is made in step S904, that is, if the round ending this time is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of moving (advancing) the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed in order to close the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL. After executing the process of step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

In step S908, the flow path in the specific region SE is switched from the first guide path GP1 that guides the game ball to the first ball entry unit 331 to the second guide path GP2 that guides the game ball to the second ball entry unit 341. Performs road switching processing. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the lower right movable plate 402L from the proximity position to the separation position is output to the first drive unit 321eL, and the lower left movable plate 412L is moved from the separation position to the proximity position. A drive signal for moving the proximity position is output to the second drive unit 321 fL.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the relationship with the flow of the game in the open / close execution mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIGS. 47 and 48 are schematic views showing the relationship between the movement of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of the game ball. In FIGS. 47 and 48, for convenience of explanation, the movable plates 402L and 412L arranged at the retracted position are indicated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 46, at the timing of tb0 when the open / close execution mode is entered, the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are arranged at the protruding positions, and the lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are arranged at the separated positions. A vertically long passing portion 420L through which a game ball can pass is formed in the center of the specific region SE. The upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are inclined downward toward the entrance side of the passing portion 420L, and for the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE and reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83L, the upper left movable plate 401L. And it is guided to the passing portion 420L by the upper right movable plate 411L. The game ball guided to the passing portion 420L traverses the specific area SE through the passing portion 420L and heads for the out port 86 (see FIG. 47 (a)).

At the timing of tb1 after shifting to the open / close execution mode and the predetermined opening period has elapsed, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, a series of first guide paths GP1 toward the first ball entry portion 331 are formed in the specific region SE by the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L. By arranging the lower right movable plate 402L at a close position, the entrance of the passing portion 420L is covered from above, and the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is avoided.

Immediately after that, at the timing of tb2, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retracts) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the first ball entry portion 331 is opened. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE will be guided to the first ball entry portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 (see FIG. 47 (a) → FIG. 47 (b)).

When the first variable winning device is in the accepting state, the first guide path GP1 is formed slightly prior to the opening of the first ball entry portion 331, and the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is hindered. Will be. Therefore, the inflow of the game ball toward the passing portion 420L into the passing portion 420L is avoided, and the avoided game ball stays in the first guide path GP1. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE before the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter moves to the retracted position temporarily stays in the first guide path GP1, and the upper right movable plate 411L moves to the retracted position. Then, we will head to the first ball entry section 331. That is, as the distance between the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball is shortened, the chances that a plurality of game balls head toward the first ball entry unit 331 together immediately after the opening of the first ball entry unit 331 increases. Therefore, at the timing immediately after the first variable winning device is switched to the receiving state, the ball entry frequency is higher than the timing at which a certain period has passed since the first variable winning device was switched to the receiving state.

At the timing of tb3 when the number of balls entering the first ball entry portion 331 reaches the upper limit, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position due to the satisfaction of the round end condition. As a result, the first variable winning device is switched from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, and the ball cannot enter the first ball entry unit 331 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In this state, the first guide path GP1 is maintained because the lower right movable plate 402L is still arranged at a close position, but the first guide path GP1 is cut off by the upper right movable plate 411L. It is not possible to move the game ball to the downstream side of the upper right movable plate 411L. More specifically, in the specific area SE, a horizontally long stage ST on which the game ball can roll is formed by the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower right movable plate 402L, and the upper right movable plate 411L, and the game ball reaches the specific area SE. Can be parked on this stage ST. That is, for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval between the rounds, the variable winning unit 83L is prevented from passing through, and the ball entry opportunity is given again at the start of the next round.

At the subsequent timing of tb4, the first guide path GP1 is switched to the second guide path GP2 while maintaining the state in which the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (descends) from the close position to the separated position, and the lower left movable plate 412L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, the target forming the lowermost portion of the stage ST is replaced from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L (see FIG. 47 (c) → FIG. 47 (d)).

At the time of this replacement, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are interlocked (synchronized). As a result, the game ball accumulated on the stage ST is handed over from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L, and the game ball is transferred between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L while the flow path is switched. Avoiding passing between.

The operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect at an intermediate position. Therefore, by configuring the lower left movable plate 412L to pass through the intersection immediately after the lower right movable plate 402L has passed through the intersection, interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L is suppressed.

When the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged at a close position, the lower right movable plate 402L is configured to straddle the intersection. If the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L is delayed, the upper end of the lower left movable plate 412L stays in contact with the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower left movable plate 412L interrupts the operation destination of the lower right movable plate 402L. Is avoided. That is, the lower right movable plate 402L itself prevents the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L from being interrupted by the lower left movable plate 412L. Since the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L has a flat surface, the upper end of the lower left movable plate 412L slides on the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower right movable plate 402L slides to a separated position. (Descent) is guaranteed.

At the timing of tb5 after the switching of the flow path is completed, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retracts) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the second ball entry portion 341 is opened. As a result, the second variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific region SE will be guided to the second ball entry portion 341 through the second guide path GP2 (see FIG. 48 (e)).

When the second variable winning device is in the accepting state, the second guide path GP2 is formed slightly prior to the opening of the second ball entry portion 341, and the inflow of the game ball into the passing portion 420L is hindered. Will be. Therefore, the inflow of the game ball toward the passing portion 420L into the passing portion 420L is avoided, and the avoided game ball stays in the second guide path GP2. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE before the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter moves to the retracted position temporarily stays in the second guide path GP2, and the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the retracted position. Then, we will head to the second ball entry section 341. At this time, since the distance between the preceding game ball and the succeeding game ball is shortened, there is an increased chance that a plurality of game balls will head toward the second ball entry section 341 together immediately after the opening of the second entry section 341. .. Therefore, at the timing immediately after the second variable winning device is switched to the receiving state, the ball entry frequency is higher than the timing at which a certain period has passed since the second variable winning device was switched to the receiving state.

It should be noted that the game ball whose guidance to the first ball entry section 331 was discontinued in the previous round is configured to be given an opportunity to enter the second ball entry section 341 although the guidance destination is different. The spill of the game ball is suitably suppressed.

At the timing of tb6 when the number of balls entering the second ball entry portion 341 reaches the upper limit, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position when the round end condition is satisfied. As a result, the second variable winning device is switched from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, and it becomes impossible to enter the second ball entry unit 341 (see FIG. 48 (f)).

In this state, the lower left movable plate 412L is still arranged at a close position, so that the second guide path GP2 is maintained, but the second guide path GP2 is cut off by the upper left movable plate 401L, so that the upper left The game ball cannot move to the downstream side of the movable plate 401L. More specifically, the stage ST is formed by the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower left movable plate 412L, and the upper right movable plate 411L in the specific area SE, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE stays on this stage ST. That is, for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval between rounds, the variable winning unit 83L is prevented from passing through, and the ball entry opportunity is given again at the start of the next round.

At the subsequent timing of tb7, the second guide path GP2 is switched to the first guide path GP1 while maintaining the state in which the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (descends) from the close position to the separated position, and the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the close position. As a result, the target forming the lowermost portion of the stage ST is replaced from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L (see FIG. 48 (f) → FIG. 48 (g)).

At the time of this replacement, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are interlocked (synchronized). As a result, the game ball accumulated on the stage ST is handed over from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, and the game ball is transferred between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L while the flow path is switched. Avoiding passing between.

The operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect at an intermediate position. Therefore, the lower right movable plate 402L passes through the intersection immediately after the lower left movable plate 412L passes through the intersection, thereby suppressing the interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L.

When the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged at a close position, the lower left movable plate 412L is configured to straddle the intersection. If the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L is delayed, the upper end of the lower right movable plate 402L stays in contact with the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, and the lower right movable plate 402L interrupts the operation destination of the lower left movable plate 412L. Has been avoided. That is, the lower left movable plate 412L itself prevents the operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L from being interrupted by the lower right movable plate 402L. Since the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L is flat, the upper end of the lower right movable plate 402L slides on the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, and the lower left movable plate 412L is slid to a separated position (descent). ) Is guaranteed.

At the timing of tb8 after the switching of the flow path is completed, the upper right movable plate 411L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the first ball entry portion 331 is opened. As a result, the first variable winning device switches from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. After that, the game ball that has reached the specific region SE will flow into the first ball entry portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 (see FIG. 48 (h)).

When the first variable winning device is put into the receiving state, the first guide path GP1 is formed so as to precede the opening of the first ball entry portion 331, and the stage ST is accompanied by the switching to the receiving state. The game ball stopped above flows into the first ball entry section 331. As a result, the frequency of entering balls increases immediately after the first variable winning device is switched to the accepting state.

After that, the game balls are alternately guided to the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 until the final round.

According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, the game is disliked that the game ball launched during the interval period does not enter the entry part and becomes a spilling ball (that is, investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from firing the ball may be made. Considering that the entry into the ball entry section triggers the progress of the game, it is feared that such a delayed action hinders the smooth progress of the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the specific area SE from passing through the specific area SE as it is during the interval period, and then the first ball entry unit 331 or the second entry unit 331 or the second entry. The game balls are stored until the guidance to the ball portion 341 is resumed. By suppressing the generation of waste balls in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to continue firing the game balls, and it is possible to facilitate the progress of the game.

When a plurality of game balls are staying on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into the ball entry portion to be the guide destination at once as the guidance is resumed. By diversifying the movement of the game ball toward the entry portion (one by one or a group of a plurality of balls), it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball.

The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first guide portion 400L and the second guide portion 410L, and the game ball can be stopped on either the first guide portion 400L or the second guide portion 410L. There is. If both the guide portions 400L and 410L form a stop surface in this way, the number of game balls that can be stopped (stored) in the stage ST can be increased while suppressing the increase in size of the variable winning unit 83L. ..

The stage ST is configured to have a downward slope in the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST are accumulated in order from the position closer to the center. When the left and right ball entry sections 331 and 341 are used together, the game balls are preferentially stored at the position closer to the center, so that the next guide destination is the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section. Regardless of which of the portions 341, it is possible to suppress the slow flow of the game ball toward the entry portions 331 and 341. Incidentally, the configuration in which the stage ST is recessed in the central portion is a device for increasing the number of game balls that can be stopped while suppressing the expansion of the width of the stage ST.

The stopped game ball can be moved between the first guide unit 400L and the second guide unit 410L, and the monotonic movement of the game ball that has reached the stage ST is suppressed.

When the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guidance state to the first guidance state, not only the game ball stopped on the first guide unit 400L but also the game ball stopped on the second guide unit 410L. Is also guided to the first ball entry section 331. Specifically, when the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L moves to the evacuation position, the game ball stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L loses its support and falls, but the second guide falls to the destination. Since the lower right movable plate 402L of the 1 guide portion 400L is located, those dropped game balls are guided to the first entry portion 331 together with the game ball stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L of the first guide portion 400L. Will be done. Further, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guided state to the second guided state, the game stopped not only on the game ball stopped on the second guide unit 410L but also on the first guide unit 400L. The ball is also guided to the second ball entry section 341. Specifically, when the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the evacuation position, the game ball stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L loses support and falls, but the falling destination is the lower left of the second guide portion 410L. Since the movable plate 412L is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the second entry portion 341 together with the game balls stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L. In this way, by setting the guide target regardless of which of the guide portions 400L and 410L is stopped, the spilling of the game ball can be suppressed and the above-mentioned entry opportunity can be suitably increased. Further, increasing the number of game balls to be guided is a configuration in which diversification of ball entry modes into each entry section 331, 341 (for example, a plurality of game balls can be collectively guided to the entry sections 331, 341). ) Can be suitably realized.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game balls staying at the stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered in each round. Therefore, even if the player has the above-mentioned relief function, it is possible to suitably suppress the excessive privilege given to the player by the stopping function.

By configuring the stage ST to be formed over the two guide paths GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the player from covering a wide area due to the presence of the stage ST. This is a preferable configuration for improving the degree of attention to the game ball while it is stationary.

In the open / close execution mode in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83L alternately switches between the first guide state and the second guide state with the non-guidance state in between. Therefore, the game ball that did not enter one of the entry sections is guided to the other entry section via a stop. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, when the lower right movable plate 402L is replaced with the lower left movable plate 412L, the bottom of the stage ST is configured to avoid interference between the two movable plates 402L and 412L. Not limited to. For example, the lower right movable plate 402L is arranged in a close position so that the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L precedes, and the upper end portion of the lower left movable plate 412L precedes the middle abdomen (lower surface) of the lower right movable plate 402L. It may be configured to be in contact with the vehicle (a configuration in which the vehicle is temporarily stopped before the intersection). After that, when the lower right movable plate 402L is separated from the intersection position, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L to the close position is resumed (passing the intersection), so that the game ball at the time of the above replacement is performed. The spill can be suppressed more preferably.

Similarly, when the target of forming the bottom of the stage ST is replaced from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, the configuration is such that interference between the two movable plates 402L and 412L is avoided, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the lower left movable plate 412L is arranged in a close position so that the lower right movable plate 402L moves first, and the upper end portion of the lower right movable plate 402L precedes the middle abdomen (lower surface) of the lower left movable plate 412L. It may be configured to be in contact with the vehicle (a configuration in which the vehicle is temporarily stopped before the intersection). After that, when the lower left movable plate 412L is separated from the intersection position, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the close position is resumed (passing through the intersection), so that the game ball at the time of the above replacement is performed. The spill can be suppressed more preferably.

<10th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, by arranging the first movable body 350 at the protruding position, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed, and the second movable body 360 is projected. By arranging it at the position, a second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion 341 was formed. In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83N in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 49, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 49 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83N, FIG. 49 (b) is a schematic view showing the urging means for the movable bodies 430N and 440N, and FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d) are the variable winning unit 83N. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship with the flow of a game ball.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the variable winning unit 83L is the first movable body 430N arranged at a position closer to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 in the specific region SE, and the specific region SE. It is provided with a second movable body 440N arranged at a position closer to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341.

The first movable body 430N has a flat plate shape, and the position where one plate surface faces the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 from the center side (second entry portion 341 side) of the specific region SE (hereinafter referred to as , Called the standby position). The vertical width dimension of the first movable body 430N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the entrance portion 332, and the entire entrance portion 332 is covered by the first movable body 430N.

The first movable body 430N is centered on either one of the upper shaft portion 431N provided at the upper end portion of the first movable body 430N and the lower shaft portion 432N provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 430N. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate. Spring 435N and 436N are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the first movable body 430N, and the first movable body 430N stays in the standby position by the urging force of the springs 435N and 436N (FIG. 49 (b). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 431N and 432N when the first movable body 430N is arranged in the standby position are referred to as "initial positions".

The first movable body 430N is connected to the drive motor 321 via the link mechanism 325N. When the output shaft portion of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), the first movable body 430N resists the urging force of the spring 435N and becomes the first centering on the lower shaft portion 432N. It rotates in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the upper shaft portion 431N is displaced toward the side closer to the second ball entry portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N changes. When rotating around the lower shaft portion 432N, the displacement of the lower shaft portion 432N from the initial position is hindered by the urging force of the spring 436N, and the lower shaft portion 432N stays at the initial position. Will be.

A guide groove 433N through which the upper shaft portion 431N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the upper shaft portion 431N, that is, the lower shaft portion 432N is formed by the guide groove 433N. The rotation range of the first movable body 430N when the first movable body 430N rotates around the above is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 433N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the first rotation position of the first movable body 430N. ..

When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) while the first movable body 430N is arranged in the standby position, the first movable body 430N has an urging force of the spring 436N. It rotates in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) around the upper shaft portion 431N against the above. As a result, the lower shaft portion 432N is displaced toward the side closer to the second ball entry portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N changes. When rotating around the upper shaft portion 431N, the displacement of the upper shaft portion 431N from the initial position is hindered by the urging force of the spring 435N, and the upper shaft portion 431N stays at the initial position.

A guide groove 434N through which the lower shaft portion 432N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the lower shaft portion 432N, that is, the upper shaft portion is formed by the guide groove 434N. The rotation range of the first movable body 430N when the first movable body 430N rotates around 431N is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 434N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the second rotation position of the first movable body 430N. ..

The second movable body 440N has a flat plate shape, and one of the plate surfaces is at a position facing the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341 from the center side (first entry portion 331 side) of the specific region SE (hereinafter,). , Called the standby position). The vertical width dimension of the second movable body 440N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the entrance portion 342, and the entire entrance portion 342 is covered by the second movable body 440N.

The second movable body 440N is centered on either one of the upper shaft portion 441N provided at the upper end portion of the second movable body 440N and the lower shaft portion 442N provided at the lower end portion of the second movable body 440N. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate. Spring 445N and 446N are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the second movable body 440N, and the second movable body 440N remains in the standby position by the urging force of the springs 445N and 446N (FIG. 49 (b). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 441N and 442N when the second movable body 440N is arranged in the standby position are referred to as "initial positions".

The second movable body 440N is connected to the drive motor 321 via the link mechanism 325N. By rotating the output shaft of the drive motor 321 in the second specific direction (clockwise direction), the second movable body 440N resists the urging force of the spring 445N and has a second predetermined direction centered on the lower shaft portion 442N. Rotate (clockwise). As a result, the upper shaft portion 441N is displaced toward the side closer to the first ball entry portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N changes. When rotating around the lower shaft portion 442N, the displacement of the lower shaft portion 442N from the initial position is hindered by the urging force of the spring 446N, and the lower shaft portion 442N stays at the initial position. Will be.

A guide groove 443N through which the upper shaft portion 441N of the second movable body 440N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the upper shaft portion 441N, that is, the lower shaft portion 442N is formed by the guide groove 443N. The rotation range of the second movable body 440N when the second movable body 440N rotates around the above is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 443N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion 341 side is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. ..

When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) while the second movable body 440N is arranged in the standby position, the second movable body 440N is attached with a spring 446N. It rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) around the upper shaft portion 441N against the force. As a result, the lower shaft portion 442N is displaced toward the side closer to the first ball entry portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N changes. When rotating around the upper shaft portion 441N, the displacement of the upper shaft portion 441N from the initial position is hindered by the urging force of the spring 445N, and the upper shaft portion 441N stays at the initial position.

A guide groove 444N through which the lower shaft portion 442N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the guide groove 444N provides a second movement range of the lower shaft portion 442N, that is, a second centering on the upper shaft portion 441N. The rotation range of the second movable body 440N when the movable body 440N rotates is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 444N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. ..

When the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are arranged in the standby position, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, so that the first ball entry portion enters the specific area SE. The first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to 331 is formed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (a) → FIG. 49 (c), the first movable body 430N rotates around the lower shaft portion 432N in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction). It is arranged at the first rotation position, and the second movable body 440N rotates around the upper shaft portion 441N in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) and is arranged at the first rotation position. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are in a state of being tilted downward toward the first ball entry portion 331, and both movable bodies 430N and 440N are brought to the first ball entry portion 331. A series of first guide paths GP1 for guiding the game ball are formed. At this time, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension during the required period for forming the flow path is suppressed.

In the state where the first guide path GP1 is formed in this way, the inflow restriction to the first ball entry portion 331 by the first movable body 430N is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific region SE is the first guide path GP1. It will flow into the first ball entry portion 331 via the above.

There is a slight gap between the rotating tips of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the gap, that is, passing through the specific region SE without flowing into the first ball entry portion 331.

When the round end condition is satisfied, such as when the number of balls entering the first ball entry section 331 reaches the upper limit, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, and the output shaft is initially set. Return to position. Along with this, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the urging force of the spring 435N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the urging force of the spring 446N. As a result, the inflow to the first ball entry section 331 is restricted by the first movable body 430N, and the guidance to the first ball entry section 331 by the first guide path GP1 is released. In this case as well, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension during the required period for releasing the flow path is suppressed.

On the other hand, when the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are arranged in the standby position and the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, the second movable body SE is in the specific area SE. A second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the ball entry portion 341 is formed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (a) → FIG. 49 (d), the first movable body 430N rotates about the upper shaft portion 431N in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and is second. The second movable body 440N is arranged at the rotation position, rotates around the lower shaft portion 442N in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction), and is arranged at the second rotation position. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are in a state of being tilted downward toward the second ball entry portion 341, and both movable bodies 430N and 440N move to the second ball entry portion 341. A series of second guide paths GP2 for guiding the game ball are formed. At this time, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension during the required period for forming the flow path is suppressed.

In the state where the second guide path GP2 is formed in this way, the inflow restriction to the second entry portion 341 by the second movable body 440N is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is the second guide path GP2. It will flow into the second ball entry section 341 via the above.

There is a slight gap between the rotating tips of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the gap, that is, passing through the specific region SE without flowing into the second ball entry portion 341.

When the round end condition is satisfied, such as when the number of balls entering the second ball entry section 341 reaches the upper limit, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, and the output shaft is initially set. Return to position. Along with this, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the urging force of the spring 436N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the urging force of the spring 445N. As a result, the inflow to the second ball entry section 341 is restricted by the second movable body 440N, and the guidance to the second ball entry section 341 by the second guide path GP2 is released. In this case as well, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension during the required period for releasing the flow path is suppressed.

According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable winning device that changes the probability of entering a ball by a guiding means, the monotonicity of the game is suppressed by strengthening the sharpness of the guided / non-guided state. can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guided state is wide. However, if an attempt is made to simply increase the size of the guiding means to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when switching states are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are used in combination, and these movable bodies 430N and 440N are arranged at the passage forming positions, respectively, so that a series of guide paths GP1 and If the GP2 is formed, it is possible to avoid increasing the size of the individual movable bodies 430N and 440N while widening the target range (the receiving width of the game ball). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the improvement.

When the first movable body 430N is arranged in the standby position, the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is covered by the first movable body 430N. As a result, entry into the first entry section 331 can be restricted. Further, when the second movable body 440N is arranged in the standby position, the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is covered by the second movable body 440N. As a result, entry into the second entry section 341 can be restricted. In this way, by making the movable bodies 430N and 440N forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 function as shutters for the ball entry portions 331 and 341, the ball enters in a situation where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed. In order to avoid entering the ball into the portions 331 and 341, it is possible to prevent the structure from becoming excessively complicated.

As described above, the configuration in which the movable bodies 430N and 440N also serve as the shutter and the passage forming portion increases the overall length (reception width of the game ball) of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, and the configuration is complicated due to the increase. It is advantageous in suppressing the change. However, for example, when the first guide path GP1 is formed and the second movable body is arranged at the passage forming position, the second ball entry portion 341 is opened and the ball enters the second ball entry section 341. Regulations will be loosened. Further, when the second guide path GP2 is formed, if the first movable body 430N is arranged at the passage forming position, the first ball entry section 331 is opened and the ball enters the first ball entry section 331. Regulations will be loosened. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the first guide path GP1 is formed, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N restrict the entry of the ball into the second entry portion 341, and the second guide At the time of forming the path GP2, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are configured to restrict entry into the first ball entry portion 331, that is, the movable bodies 430N and 440N are configured to compensate for the deterioration of the regulation function. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If the movable bodies 430N and 440N rotate toward each other to form the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the impact when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed can be strengthened. As a result, not only the ball entering the ball entry portions 331 and 341 but also the effect of visual change (movement of the movable bodies 430N and 440N) immediately before the ball entry occurs can be suitably exerted.

In particular, when the movable body is arranged in the game area PE, the presence of the movable body can be a factor that limits the flow path. Here, if the movable bodies 430N and 440N rotate toward each other to form the guide paths GP1 and GP2 as shown in the present embodiment, the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed. Below, the region between the movable bodies 430N and 440N can be suitably used as a flow path for the game ball.

When the movable bodies 430N and 440N are arranged in the standby position, the movable bodies 430N and 440N form the passage wall surface of the flow path. If the passage wall surface is configured by the movable bodies 430N and 440N in this way, coexistence with other game parts can be suitably realized even when a plurality of movable bodies are provided side by side in the game area PE.

When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, their responsiveness depends on the slower moving body. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in each of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the passage length of the portion formed by the first movable body 430N and the passage of the portion formed by the second movable body 440N. If the length is equally divided, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the difference in size can be suitably suppressed.

When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed by the game ball being caught in the joint portion thereof. When the movable bodies 430N and 440N function as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball, the position accuracy may be lowered due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the movable bodies constituting the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are arranged so as to be offset (offset) above the extension of the movable bodies constituting the downstream portions. , The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When the movable bodies 430N and 440N are rotatable, a force that rotates the movable bodies 430N and 440N is applied by the collision of the game balls. As for the movable body forming the downstream part of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the guide grooves 433N and 443N hinder the further downward rotation, so that the posture is maintained even if pushed by the game ball. Change can be avoided. On the other hand, the movable body forming the upstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is prevented from rotating further upward by the guide grooves 434N and 444N, but rotates due to the collision of the game ball. The direction in which is induced is opposite to the regulatory direction. That is, it cannot be expected that the movable body forming the upstream portion is prevented from rotating due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the movable body that is not easily affected by the collision of the game ball to the downstream side and the movable body that is easily affected to the upstream side, the entrance portion 332, 342 of the ball entry portion 331, 341 is set. It suppresses the flow of games from being significantly disturbed in the vicinity.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, when the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 430N, the operation region (displacement region) of the first movable body 430N and the second guide path GP2 are formed. The configuration is such that the operating region (displacement region) of the first movable body 430N overlaps with the configuration to suppress the expansion of the dead space, but the configuration is not limited to this. The operating region (displacement region) of the first movable body 430N when the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 430N and the operating region of the first movable body 430N when the second guide path GP2 is formed ( It is also possible to configure the configuration so that it does not overlap with the displacement region). Similarly, the operating region of the second movable body 440N can be configured to avoid duplication.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, both movable bodies 430N and 440N are driven by using one drive motor 321. However, the drive unit for the first movable body 430N and the drive unit for the second movable body 440N are used. And may be provided individually. Further, the drive unit that drives both movable bodies 430N and 440N when the first guide path GP1 is formed and the drive unit that drives both movable bodies 430N and 440N when the second guide path GP2 is formed are individually driven. It may be provided.

<11th embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, the movements of the movable bodies 430N and 440N are synchronized in forming the guide paths (guide paths GP1 and GP2) to the ball entry portion by the combination of the plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N. did. This embodiment is also similar in that a guide path to the ball entry portion is formed by combining a plurality of movable bodies, but the length (reception width) of the guide path changes depending on the situation. One of the features is that it is. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83P in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 50.

The housing 310P of the variable winning unit 83P is provided with a ball entry portion 331 into which a game ball can enter. The entrance portion 332 of the ball entry portion 331 faces sideways, and the first movable body 350P is arranged so as to cover the entrance portion 332 of the ball entry portion 331. Specifically, the first movable body 350P has a substantially flat plate shape, and one plate surface is arranged so as to face the inlet portion 332.

A shaft portion 432P is provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 350P. The posture of the first movable body 350P changes by being rotatable around the shaft portion 432P. Then, by being arranged at a predetermined rotation position, the entrance portion 332 of the ball entry portion 331 is opened, and a guide path GP1 having a downward inclination toward the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is formed.

A passage region ME for a game ball is provided on the side of the ball entry portion 331 (the side facing the entrance portion 332). A substantially flat plate-shaped second movable body 440P is provided at a position opposite to the first movable body 350P with the passing region ME interposed therebetween. The second movable body 440P is arranged so that one plate surface faces the first ball entry portion 331 side. The posture of the second movable body 440P changes by being rotatable around a shaft portion 441P provided at the upper end portion. Then, by arranging the second movable body 440P at a predetermined rotation position, the second movable body 440P is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side.

In the variable winning unit 83P in the present embodiment, the drive unit 321P for the first movable body 350P and the drive unit 448P for the second movable body 440P are individually provided. These drive units 321P and 448P are similar in that drive control is performed by the main control device 162, but their operating conditions are different. Specifically, the drive unit 321P is configured to move the first movable body 430P to a predetermined rotation position on condition that the round start condition is satisfied during the open / close execution mode, whereas the drive unit 321P is configured to move the first movable body 430P to a predetermined rotation position. The 321P has a configuration in which the position (predetermined rotation position / standby position) of the second movable body 440P is periodically (periodically) switched.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83P is in a state where only the first movable body 430P is arranged at a predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 50B), the first movable body 430P, and the first movable body 430P. A state in which both of the second movable body 440P are arranged in a predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 50 (c)), a state in which only the second movable body 440P is arranged in a predetermined rotation position, and a first movable body 430P. Both the second movable body 440P and the second movable body 440P are roughly classified into a state in which they are arranged in the standby position (see FIG. 50A). The frequency of entering the ball into the ball entry portion 331 (entrance portion 332) differs depending on each of these states. Hereinafter, the relationship between each state and the ball entry frequency will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 50 (b) and 50 (c).

As shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the first movable body 430P is arranged at a predetermined rotation position and the second movable body 440P is arranged at the standby position, the ball is entered by the first movable body 430P. A guide path GP for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the portion 331 is formed. Here, the passing region ME is roughly classified into a first region GE1 on the first movable body 430P side and a second region GE2 on the second movable body 440P side. In each region GE1 and GE2, the width of the flow path is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The target of guidance by the first movable body 430P is a game ball that flows down the first region GE1 among the game balls that flow down the two regions GE1 and GE2. Specifically, the first region GE1 is shredded by the first movable body 430P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is oriented by reaching the first movable body 430P. change. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is guided to the entrance portion 332 of the entry portion 331. Since the first movable body 430P is prevented from protruding into the second region GE2, the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 passes between the two movable bodies 430P and 440P as it is (passing region ME). It will go to the out port 86 (passing through).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when both the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P are arranged at predetermined rotation positions, for example, the first movable body 430P is predetermined. The first is under the condition that the second movable body 440P is arranged at a predetermined rotation position under the condition that the second movable body 440P is arranged at the rotation position, or the second movable body 440P is arranged at the predetermined rotation position. When the movable body 430P is arranged at a predetermined rotation position, a series of guide path GPs are formed by the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P. As a result, the guide path GP is formed so as to straddle the first region GE1 and the second region GE2, and the game ball flowing down in any of the two regions GE1 and GE2 is also a guide target. That is, the receiving width of the guide path GP is expanded as compared with the case where the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430P alone.

Specifically, the first region GE1 is shredded by the first movable body 430P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is oriented by reaching the first movable body 430P. The second region GE2 is shredded by the second movable body 440P arranged at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 reaches the second movable body 440P and is oriented. change. As a result, each game ball flowing down the first region GE1 and the second region GE2 is guided to the entrance portion 332 of the entry portion 331, passes between the two movable bodies 430P and 440P (passes through the passage region ME). It is avoided to go to the out port 86.

When the second movable body 440P is independently arranged at a predetermined rotation position, a blank is generated between the guide path GP formed by the second movable body 440P and the first ball entry portion 331. Therefore, the guidance function is not exerted well, and since the entrance portion 332 is covered by the first movable body 430P, the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 332 is avoided.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode and the ball is allowed to enter the first ball entry unit 331, the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430P alone, and both are movable. In some cases, the guide path GP is formed by the bodies 430P and 440P. When these two states are compared, the latter has a higher probability of entering the ball (entry frequency) than the former, and the game can be promoted advantageously. By realizing the diversification of ball entry modes in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

<12th embodiment>
In the eleventh embodiment, the plurality of movable bodies 430P and 440P are used in combination to change the total length of the guide path GP (the receiving width of the game ball in the passing region ME) to enter the ball entry portion 331. It was configured to change the ball frequency. In the present embodiment, a branch is provided in the ball entry section 331, and the destination of the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry section 331 changes depending on the change in the total length of the guide path (the receiving width in the passing region ME). It is one of the features that it is. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83Q shown in the present embodiment and the configuration related thereto will be described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c), focusing on the differences from the eleventh embodiment. ..

The ball entry portion 331Q shown in the present embodiment has a ball passage 333Q through which the game ball flowing into the entrance portion 332Q passes. The ball passage 333Q is roughly divided into an upstream side passage portion 336Q extending from the entrance portion 332Q in the same direction as the guide path GP, and a first downstream side passage portion 337Q and a second downstream side passage portion 338Q branching into two branches. ..

The first downstream side passage portion 337Q and the second downstream side passage portion 338Q extend in the vertical direction, and the entrances that open upward are arranged side by side so as to be located on the extension of the upstream side passage portion 336Q. More specifically, the entrance of the first downstream passage portion 337Q is arranged so as to be closer to the upstream passage portion 336Q than the entrance of the second downstream passage portion 338Q. When the moving speed of the game balls passing through the most downstream part of the upstream side passage portion 336Q is equal to or lower than a predetermined speed, the game balls flow into the first downstream side passage portion 337Q and pass through the most downstream portion. When the moving speed exceeds the predetermined speed, the game ball jumps over the entrance of the first downstream side passage portion 337Q and flows into the second downstream side passage portion 338Q. That is, the inflow destination changes depending on the moving speed of the game ball.

The main control device 162 in the present embodiment is configured to determine whether or not to shift the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode to the high probability mode during the open / close execution mode. Specifically, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is set to the high probability mode based on the fact that the ball enters the second downstream passage portion 338Q within the predetermined valid period in the open / close execution mode. The lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is set to the low probability mode based on the fact that the ball does not enter the second downstream passage portion 338Q within the predetermined valid period. That is, whether or not the game can be advanced advantageously by shifting to the high probability mode depends on the moving speed of the game ball that has flowed into the ball entry portion.

Here, the second movable body 440Q is disposed at a position opposite to the first movable body 430Q across the passing region ME of the game ball, and the operation mode of the second movable body 440Q is hit. The configuration is determined according to the type. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51 (d), the period of being arranged at a predetermined rotation position differs depending on the type of hit. In the present embodiment, 16R jackpot result A and 16R jackpot result B are set as jackpot types.

In the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position only in the specific round (7th round). More specifically, the second movable body 440Q returns to the original position when the first operation period elapses from the start timing of the specific round. The first operation period is the length (4.8 sec) obtained by multiplying the firing interval period (0.6 sec) of the game ball by the upper limit number of balls (8), that is, the same as the shortest execution period of the round. It is set. Therefore, the second movable body 440Q returns to the original position before the end of the specific round.

On the other hand, in the 16R jackpot result B, the second movable body 440Q is maintained at a predetermined rotation position in a plurality of rounds including a specific round (seventh round). More specifically, the second movable body 440Q returns to the original position when the second operation period elapses from the start timing of the specific round. The second operation period is set longer than the shortest period of the round (specifically, it is set to be the period obtained by multiplying the shortest period by the number of remaining rounds (10)). This period is longer than the maximum execution period (30 sec) of the round, and the second movable body 440Q is maintained at a predetermined rotation position over a plurality of rounds.

If the period in which the ball is placed at the predetermined rotation position is long, the expectation of entering the ball into the second downstream passage portion 338Q is higher than in the case where the period is short. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between the destination of the game ball and the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430Q alone, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 hits the first movable body 430Q, changes its direction, and enters. It is guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the ball portion 331Q. This game ball is accelerated when moving along the first movable body 430Q and the upstream side passage portion 336Q, and although the moving speed along the guide path GP increases, it passes through the most downstream portion of the upstream side passage portion 336Q. The moving speed at the time of doing is lower than the above-mentioned predetermined speed. Therefore, most of the game balls that have entered the ball entry portion 331Q flow into the first downstream side passage portion 337Q.

The game ball flowing down the second region GE2 passes directly between the two movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, and is excluded from the guidance target toward the ball entry portion 331. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the first region GE1 is the same as the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second region GE2, and about half of the game balls flowing down the passing region ME go to the entry section 331. You will be guided.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the guide path GP is formed by the combination of both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is the first movable body. Not only is it turned around at 430Q and guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the entry portion 331Q, but also the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 hits the second movable body 440Q and changes its direction, and the entrance portion 332Q of the entry portion 331Q is changed. You will be guided to. Although these game balls accelerate when moving along the movable bodies 430Q, 440Q and the upstream passage portion 336Q, when passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q according to the landing position in the guide path GP. There is a difference in the moving speed of. Specifically, for the game ball landing on the first movable body 430Q, the moving speed when passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream side passage portion 336Q is lower than the above-mentioned predetermined speed, while the game landing on the second movable body 440Q. For the ball, the acceleration section is extended, and the moving speed of the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 336Q exceeds the predetermined speed.

That is, when the guide path GP is formed by both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the frequency of entry into the ball entry portion 331Q is compared with the case where the guide path GP is formed by the first movable body 430Q alone. Not only does the game progress temporarily faster by doubling the number of balls, but also the transition to a high-probability mode based on the inflow of game balls into the second downstream passage section 338Q that constitutes the "advantageous entry section". Is more likely to occur.

As described above, if the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q are used in combination to change the total length of the guide path, the monotonicization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Further, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51 (e), while the guide path GP is extended by the second movable body 440Q, the game progress is accelerated and the rate of increase in the number of balls held increases. This benefit may be limited to the above-mentioned specific round or may be continued in a round other than the specific round, and in the latter case, the game can be advanced more advantageously than the former. In this way, by diversifying the games in the open / close execution mode, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the games.

<Modification 1>
It is not always necessary to set the drive condition of the second movable body 440Q in a period. For example, in the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is placed at a predetermined rotation position at the start of the specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to the original position at the end of the specific round. In the 16R jackpot result B, the second movable body 440Q is placed in a predetermined rotation position at the start of a specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to the original position at the end of the open / close execution mode. It is also possible to make it a configuration.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the overall length (reception width) of the guide path is changed by a combination of a plurality of movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient if the passing area of the game ball to be guided can be changed. For example, in the case of a rotary shutter, the inflow probability is changed according to the rotation angle (opening amount) of the shutter. Is also possible.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q are rotatable, but in forming a plurality of guide paths having different total lengths by using a plurality of movable bodies (in order to extend the guide paths). Then), it is not always necessary to make the movable body rotatable. For example, both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be slid back and forth, or one of both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be rotatable and the other may be slidable.

<Modification example 4>
In the twelfth embodiment, the lower end portion of the first movable body 430Q is a rotation base end portion, and the upper end portion of the second movable body 440Q is a rotation base end portion. Further, the rotation direction of the first movable body 430Q and the rotation direction of the second movable body 440Q when forming the guide path were set to be opposite to each other. The first movable body 430Q alone guides the game ball to the entry section 331Q, and both the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q guide the game ball to the entry section 331Q. If a series of second guide paths GP2 can be formed, it is arbitrary as to which portion is used as the rotation base end portion and the rotation direction thereof.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q is included in the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not something that is done. It is sufficient if it is possible to make a difference in the frequency of entering the ball entering portion 331Q by changing the area to be guided (the receiving width of the game ball), and the guiding path having a relatively small receiving width is relative. It is not always necessary to configure the structure so that it is included in the guide path having a large receiving width.

<13th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, by arranging the first movable body 350 at the protruding position, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed, and the second movable body 360 is projected. By arranging the ball at the position, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion 341 is formed. This embodiment is also the same as the first embodiment in that the guide paths GP1 and GP2 for guiding the game ball are formed to each of the two juxtaposed ball entry portions 331 and 341. , The specific configuration for forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83R in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 52 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83R, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83R.

A movable body 450R as a "guidance means" is arranged in the specific area SE sandwiched between the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 in the variable winning unit 83R. The movable body 450R has a horizontally long shape extending in the parallel direction of both ball entry portions 331 and 341, and is assembled to the housing 310 in a state of protruding from the front surface portion 312R of the housing 310R.

The movable body 450R is axially supported at an intermediate position in the parallel arrangement direction, and can rotate around the axial support portion 451R. Specifically, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), so that the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), and the drive motor 321 The movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) by rotating the output shaft of the above in the second specific direction (clockwise direction).

The vertical position of the movable body 450R is arranged near the upper boundary in the specific region SE, and the upper surface 452R thereof overhangs above the specific region SE. On the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R, a first inclined portion 453R having a downward inclination from above the shaft support portion 451R toward the first ball entry portion 331 and a second ball entry portion 341 from above the shaft support portion 451R. A second inclined portion 454R having a downward inclination is formed on the side. When the movable body 450R is in a substantially horizontal standby state, the game ball that has fallen onto the movable body 450R is guided to the first ball entry section 331 side or the second ball entry section 341 side by the inclined portions 453R and 454R. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the case where the movable body 450R is in the standby state is the non-guidance state of the variable winning unit 83R.

The gap size between the first inclined portion 453R and the first ball entry portion 331 and the gap size between the second inclined portion 454R and the second ball entry portion 341 are smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. The game ball cannot pass through. That is, when the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the movable body 450R restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific area SE, and the entry into each of the entry portions 331 and 341 is avoided. The gap size is set sufficiently smaller than the diameter size of the game ball, and the game ball distributed to the left and right by the inclined portions 453R and 454R is caught in the gap and stays on the movable body 430. Is avoided.

The upper surface of each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 gently descends to the side of the variable winning unit 83R, and the game ball is moved from the inclined portions 453R and 454 of the movable body 450R to the upper surface of each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341. Will fall to the side of the variable winning unit 83R.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a) → FIG. 53 (b), the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction under the condition that the movable body 450R is in the standby state, so that the movable body The 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R changes so as to descend to the right and switches to the first guide state. In the first guidance state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined so as to descend to the right, and the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R plays a game to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. The first guide path GP1 for guiding the sphere is formed.

The game ball that has fallen from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R changes its direction by hitting the variable winning unit 83R and moves along the first guide path GP1. As a result, the ball enters the first ball entry unit 331.

The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that defines the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that further rotation is not possible. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the first ball entry portion 331 than the shaft support portion 451R, it is possible to prevent the posture of the movable body 450R from changing. ing.

In the first guide state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the second ball entry portion 341 is larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, the main flow path when the game ball heads toward the variable winning unit 83R is downward, and the separation distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the second ball entry portion 341 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is set. It is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific region SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the second winning portion 341, and the second ball passes through the specific region SE. 2 It is preferably suppressed from entering the ball entry portion 341.

When the round end condition is satisfied, such as when the number of balls entering the first ball entry unit 331 reaches a predetermined number, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction. As a result, the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction and returns from the first guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53 (b) → FIG. 53 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 53 (a) → FIG. 53 (c), the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction under the condition that the movable body 450R is in the standby state, so that the movable body becomes a movable body. The 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R changes so as to descend to the left and switches to the second guide state. In the second guidance state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined so as to descend to the left, and the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R plays a game to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341. A second guide path GP2 that guides the sphere is formed.

The game ball that has fallen from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R changes its direction by hitting the variable winning unit 83R and moves along the second guide path GP2. As a result, the ball enters the second ball entry unit 341.

The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that defines the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that further rotation is not possible. Therefore, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the second entry portion 341 than the shaft support portion 451R, it is possible to prevent the posture of the movable body 450R from changing. ing.

In the second guide state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the first ball entry portion 331 is larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, the main flow path when the game ball heads toward the variable winning unit 83R is downward, and the separation distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the first ball entry portion 331 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is set. It is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific region SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the first winning portion 331, and the first ball passes through the specific region SE. 1 It is preferably suppressed from entering the ball entry portion 331.

When the round end condition is satisfied, such as when the number of balls entering the second ball entry unit 341 reaches a predetermined number, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction. As a result, the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction and returns from the second guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (a)).

According to the thirteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable winning devices in combination in order to realize diversification of games and to improve the degree of attention to games. For example, it is possible to promote the diversification of games by providing a difference in the superiority (privilege given) of the ball entry section. In such a configuration, when the first variable winning device including the first ball winning portion and the second variable winning device including the second winning portion are individually provided, the occupied area of each of the winning devices is increased. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other gaming parts in the gaming area PE. In this respect, in the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment, the movable body forming the guide path GP1 to the first ball entry portion 331 and the movable body forming the guide path GP2 to the second ball entry portion 341. By sharing with, the expansion of the occupied area of the variable winning unit 83R is suppressed.

Further, for example, when a movable body for guidance is provided for each winning device, each ball-filling portion becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) due to having a plurality of ball-filling portions can be expected. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the guide destination changes according to the change in the posture of the movable body 450R, so that the player can imagine which guide destination will be the movable body 450R. It is expected to pay attention. As a result, an effect that exceeds the effect (effect of improving attention) simply by using a plurality of ball entry portions in combination can be expected.

The first entry section 331 and the second entry section 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, and the specific region SE sandwiched by the entry sections 331 and 341 is the entry section 331. It is an introduction part when a game ball enters 341. Here, when the gaming state is not in the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) (for example, when it is in the normal gaming state), the movable body 450R is maintained in the non-guided state, and in the non-guided state, the movable body The specific region SE is covered from above by the 450R. As a result, the inflow of the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 83R into the specific area SE is restricted. Therefore, when the variable winning unit 83R is in the non-guided state, the ball entering each of the ball-entry portions 331 and 341 is preferably avoided.

When the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 83R is first entered by the first inclined portion 453R and the second inclined portion 454R formed on the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R. It will flow down separately to the portion 331 side or the second ball entry portion 341 side. With such a configuration, the variable winning unit 83R can function as a branch portion (distribution portion) for branching the flow path of the game ball.

When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed due to the presence of these inclined portions 453R and 454R, the inclination angle of the rolling surface becomes tighter on the downstream side than on the upstream side. That is, the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are guided to each of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, the distance between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over-winning).

The first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 341 are arranged side by side, and the movable body 450R is located between the ball entry sections 331 and 341 in the parallel arrangement direction of the ball entry sections 331 and 341. Is located in. With such an arrangement, the movable body 450R is downsized and the amount of change in the posture of the movable body (moving area) is reduced.

The rotation direction of the movable body 450R when forming the first guide path GP1 and the rotation direction of the movable body 450R when forming the second guide path GP2 are opposite directions. With such a configuration, the operating region can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the movable body is limited to one direction. Further, the rolling surface of the first guide path GP1 and the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 can be configured by the same plate surface. This is preferable in order to reduce the thickness of the movable body 450R.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the movable body 450R forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 functions as a regulating means for restricting entry into each entry portion 331, 341, but it corresponds to the regulating means. May be used together. For example, the variable winning unit 83S shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 54A includes a first shutter 370S for the first ball-entry unit 331 and a second shutter 380S for the second ball-entry unit 341. The shutters 370S and 380S can be moved to a protruding position protruding into the specific region SE and a retracted position in which the protrusion to the specific region SE is suppressed. In the state where the first shutter 370S is arranged in the protruding position, the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is restricted by the first shutter 370S, and the first shutter 370S is arranged in the retracted position. In the state, the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is allowed. Further, in a state where the second shutter 380S is arranged at the protruding position, the second shutter 380S regulates the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341, and the second shutter 380S is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, the inflow of the game ball into the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is allowed.

The shutters 370S and 380S are connected to a drive motor for the movable body 450S via a link mechanism, and are moved to a standby position / protruding position by the power of the drive motor. Specifically, when the movable body 450S is in the standby state, both shutters 370S and 380S are located at the protruding positions, and when the movable body 450S is in the first guide state, it follows (interlocks with). When the first shutter 370S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54 (a1) → FIG. 54 (a2)) and the movable body 450S is in the second guidance state, the first shutter 370S follows (in conjunction with) the second guide state. 2 The shutter 380S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54 (a1) → FIG. 54 (a3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of accidental ball entry in a situation where ball entry into the ball entry portions 331 and 341 should be avoided.

<Modification 2>
As shown in FIG. 54B, the movable body 450T is used to suppress the entry of the ball into the second entry portion 341 in the first guide state and the entry into the first entry portion 331 in the second guide state. Is smaller than the diameter of the game ball in the size of the gap (gap size L5) formed between the movable body 450T and the top of the second ball entry portion 341 when is in the first guide state. As shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the movable body 450T is in the second guide state, it is formed between the movable body 450T and the top of the first ball entry portion 331. It is preferable to form the gap so that the size of the gap (gap dimension L6) is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball.

For example, facing portions 456T and 457T facing the inlet portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are formed at the left and right ends of the movable body 450T in a standby state. When the gap is reduced by the facing portions 456T and 457T, the game ball toward the gap may collide with the facing portions 456T and 457T. Therefore, if these facing portions 456T and 457T are formed in a curved surface shape centered on the shaft support portion 451T (rotation center axis), the posture of the movable body 450T changes due to an impact generated when the game ball collides. This can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the lock device is used to maintain the movable body 450R in the standby state, but if the movable body 450R can be maintained in the standby state, the specific configuration thereof will be described. Optional. For example, it may be configured to suppress the change in posture from the standby state by the urging force of the urging means such as a spring, or it may be configured to suppress the change in posture from the standby state by the magnetic force of a magnet or the like.

<Modification example 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the movable body 450R is in the guided state, it is maintained in the guided state by the holding force (torque) generated in the drive motor 321 (stepping motor). A configuration (for example, a locking device such as a stopper) for suppressing a change in the posture of the movable body 450R in a state may be separately provided.

<14th embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 are formed by the rotary movable body 450T. When the movable body 450T is a rotary type, it is assumed that the load applied to the shaft support portion due to the collision of the game ball with the movable body 450T becomes large. Deformation such as distortion in the shaft support portion due to such a load may be a factor that hinders the improvement of the operational stability of the movable body 450T. In particular, in a configuration in which the posture of the movable body 450T is substantially horizontal in the standby state, the load becomes larger than in the case of the first guide state or the second guide state. Furthermore, if the period during which the standby state is maintained is longer than the period during which the first guidance state or the second guidance state is maintained, the above concern becomes greater.

One of the features of the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment is that the variable winning unit 83U is devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83U in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, focusing on the differences from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83U, FIG. 55 (b) is a vertical sectional view of the variable winning unit 83U, and FIG. 55 (c) shows the rotation angle of the drive motor 321U and the state of the movable body 450U. A schematic diagram showing the relationship, FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between various states of the variable winning unit 83U and the flow of the game ball. In FIG. 56, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 450U in the housed state is indicated by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the main body portion 311U of the housing 310U is formed with a housing portion 461U capable of accommodating the movable body 450U. The accommodating portion 461U is opened to the specific region SE side through the opening 462U formed in the front surface portion 312U of the housing 310U, and the movable body 450U can appear and disappear through the opening 462U.

Regarding the transmission block 325U that connects the movable body 450U and the drive motor 321, the slide mechanism that slides the movable body 450U back and forth according to the rotation angle of the drive motor 321 (output shaft) and the rotation of the drive motor 321 (output shaft). It is combined with a rotation mechanism that rotates the movable body 450U in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) according to the moving angle.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 is arranged at the initial rotation position (rotation angle 0 °), the movable body 450U is in the accommodation state. When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (clockwise direction) from the initial rotation position when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the movable body 450U slides forward. As a result, the movable body 450U is in a standby state in which the movable body 450U protrudes into the specific region SE (see FIG. 56 (a) → FIG. 56 (b)). Even after the standby state, the movable body 450U rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and the posture of the movable body 450U changes by continuing the rotation in the first specific direction. As a result, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed (see FIG. 56 (b) → FIG. 56 (c)).

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331 through the first guide path GP1 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. During the interval period between rounds, the movable body 450U returns to the standby state. Specifically, when the round end condition is satisfied under the condition of the first guide state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the first guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 56 (c) → FIG. 56 (b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped to maintain the movable body 450U in the standby state. During the open / close execution mode, the movable body 450U is not put into the accommodation state at each interval, but is limited to the return to the standby state, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the responsiveness.

When the open / close execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the first guidance state to the accommodation state via the standby state. In the housed state, the movable body 450U is prevented from protruding toward the specific region SE side, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

Next, a case of shifting to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode will be described. When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction) from the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U slides forward and becomes a standby state protruding into the specific region SE (see FIG. 56 (a) → FIG. 56 (b)). The movement up to this point is the same as when the output shaft rotates in the first specific direction from the initial rotation position. Even after the standby state, the movable body 450U rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) by continuing the rotation in the second specific direction, and the posture of the movable body 450U changes. As a result, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion 341 is formed (see FIG. 56 (b) → FIG. 56 (d)).

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the guidance of the game ball to the second entry portion 341 through the second guide path GP2 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. During the interval period between rounds, the movable body 450U returns to the standby state. Specifically, when the round end condition is satisfied under the condition of the second guide state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the second guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 56 (d) → FIG. 56 (b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped to maintain the movable body 450U in the standby state. During the open / close execution mode, the movable body 450U is not put into the accommodation state at each interval, but is limited to the return to the standby state, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the responsiveness.

When the open / close execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the second guidance state to the accommodation state via the standby state. In the housed state, the movable body 450U is prevented from protruding toward the specific region SE side, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

In the present embodiment, the game ball launched aiming at the upper operating port 91 in the normal game state can flow down toward the variable winning unit 83U. However, in the normal gaming state, the movable body 450U is maintained in the accommodated state, and the protrusion to the specific area SE side is avoided. This prevents the game ball from colliding with the movable body 450U.

In the configuration of switching between the accommodation state, the standby state, and the guidance state, the responsiveness may decrease due to the addition of the accommodation state. In this respect, the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment is configured so as not to go through the accommodation state when switching between the standby state and the guidance state, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience and smoothly advancing the game. We are trying to realize it.

In the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment, the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 83U under the condition that the movable body 450U is housed is allowed to pass through the specific area SE. .. Similar to the first modification in the first embodiment, the lower operating port 92U is arranged in this specific area SE, and a game ball passing through the specific area SE can enter the lower operating port 92. It has a configuration (see FIG. 55 (a)). As a result, the variable winning unit 83U and other game parts coexist.

In the configuration in which the movable body 450U functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the shaft support portion. This hinders the stabilization of the posture of the movable body 450U. Therefore, if the movable body 450U is retracted to the accommodating portion 461U as shown in the present embodiment, unnecessary contact with the game ball can be suppressed and the shaft support portion can be protected.

Further, by retracting the movable body 450U to the accommodating portion 461U, the front of the movable body 450U can be utilized as a passing area of the game ball. As a result, the restrictions on the flow path of the game ball can be relaxed.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation center portion of the rotary movable body 450R is set at the central portion of the movable body 450R. In such a configuration, it is possible to realize the simplification of the configuration related to rotation, but in the guided state, the portion opposite to the guide destination of the game ball with respect to the rotation center portion. When the game balls collide with each other, stress is generated that prompts the movable body 450R to return to the standby state. This can induce variations in the posture of the movable body 450R and hinder the stabilization of the guiding function. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83V in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83R shown in the thirteenth embodiment.

The movable body 470V extends in the parallel arrangement direction of the first ball entry portion 331 and the second ball entry portion 341, and shaft portions 481V and 482V are provided at both ends in the parallel arrangement direction. A vertically long first guide groove 483V through which the first shaft portion 481V on the first ball entry portion 331 side is inserted and a second shaft portion 482V on the second ball entry portion 341 side are inserted into the front surface portion 312V of the housing 310V. A vertically long second guide groove 484V is formed.

The housing 310V is provided with a first urging member 485V (spring) that connects the housing 310V and the first shaft portion 481V, and a second urging member 486V that connects the housing 310V and the second shaft portion 482V. Has been done. The urging force of the first urging member 485V presses the first shaft portion 481V against the upper end of the first guide groove 483V, and the urging force of the second urging member 486V causes the second shaft portion 482V to form the second guide groove 484V. By being pressed against the upper end portion, the movable body 470V is held in the standby state (horizontal state). That is, the posture of the movable body 450V is kept horizontal by the urging forces of the two urging members 485V and 486V.

The first guide groove 483V has an arc shape centered on the upper end portion of the second guide groove 484V, and the second guide groove 484V has an arc shape centered on the upper end portion of the first guide groove 483V. .. These guide grooves 483V and 484V define the movement range of each shaft portion 481V and 482V.

As shown in FIG. 57B, a horizontally long link member 325V is fixed to the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 so that the link member 325V straddles the first shaft portion 481V and the second shaft portion 482V. A first acting portion 325aV that can be engaged with the tip portion of the first shaft portion 481V is formed at one end thereof, and is engaged with the tip portion of the second shaft portion 482V at the other end portion. A possible second working portion 325bV is formed. Specifically, the first shaft portion 481V and the second shaft portion 482V are configured to be targeted so as to sandwich the fixed portion of the output shaft 322.

The first acting portion 325aV and the second acting portion 325bV have a concave shape that is open downward, and when these acting portions 325aV and 325b descend, the engagement with the shaft portions 481V and 482V is maintained. The power transmission path from the drive motor 321 is secured, and when the vehicle rises, the power is not transmitted.

When the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft 322 rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction), the first shaft portion 481V is pushed down by the first acting portion 325aV, and the first shaft portion is pushed down. 481V moves from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the first guide groove 483V. At this time, the second working portion 325bV rises so as to move away from the second shaft portion 482V. Therefore, the second shaft portion 482V stays in the initial position by the urging force of the second urging member 486V. In this way, as the first shaft portion 481V descends along the first guide groove 483V, the movable body 470V rotates around the second shaft portion 482V, and the posture of the movable body 470V is first entered. It changes so as to have a downward inclination toward the ball portion 331 (see FIG. 57 (a) → FIG. 57 (c)). As a result, the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is formed.

When the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft 322 rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), the second shaft portion 482V is pushed down by the second acting portion 325bV, and the second shaft portion 482V is pushed down. The portion 482V moves from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the second guide groove 484V. At this time, the first acting portion 325aV rises so as to move away from the first shaft portion 481V. Therefore, the first shaft portion 481V stays in the initial position by the urging force of the first urging member 485V. In this way, the second shaft portion 482V descends along the second guide groove 484V, so that the movable body 470V rotates about the first shaft portion 481V, and the posture of the movable body 470V enters the second position. It changes so as to have a downward inclination toward the ball portion 341 (see FIG. 57 (a) → FIG. 57 (d)). As a result, the second guide path GP2 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is formed.

According to the fifteenth embodiment detailed above, the movable body 470V is held by two urging members 485V and 486V. Therefore, even if the movable body 470V has a function as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball, the impact generated by the collision of the game ball can be mitigated by the urging members 485V and 486V. Since it is possible to avoid applying a large load to the rotation center portion, it is possible to suitably improve the posture stability of the movable body 470V.

Further, when guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section 331, the movable body 470V rotates around the end portion on the second entry section 341 side to guide the game ball to the second entry section 341. In this case, the movable body 470V rotates around the end on the side of the first ball entry portion 331. Therefore, in the state where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed, the portion of the ball receiving portion (upper surface 472V of the movable body 470V) opposite to the guide destination of the game ball with respect to the rotation center portion becomes extremely small. , It is possible to preferably avoid the stress generated by the collision of the game ball or the like acting to return the movable body 470V to the standby state.

<16th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotary movable body 450R shown in the thirteenth embodiment is devised to increase the ball entry probability (reduce the spilling ball) shown in the fifth embodiment. It is one of the features that it is. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58, the configuration according to the device will be described focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83R in the thirteenth embodiment. The housing 310W of the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment is provided with a cover portion that covers the specific area SE from the front of the gaming machine. However, in FIG. 58, the cover is omitted for convenience of explanation. There is.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the movable body 450W is in the standby state, the upper surface 452W (first inclined portion 453W and the second inclined portion 454W) and the ball entry portion 3311 of the movable body 450W. The upper surface portion of the 341 forms a first detour passage TE1 that detours the specific region SE from the first ball entry portion 331 side and a second detour passage TE2 that detours from the second ball entry portion 341 side. The housing 310W (specifically, the cover portion and the front portion 312W) faces each other with the passage region of the game ball in the detour passages TE1 and TE2 interposed therebetween, and a pair of front and rear wall portions constituting the passage wall surface of the detour passages TE1 and TE2. 491W is formed.

A plurality of protrusions 492W and 493W protruding toward the mating side are formed on each wall portion 491W. These protrusions 492W and 493W form ridges extending vertically, and are arranged so as to alternate between the front wall portion 491W side and the rear wall portion 491W side in the passage direction. The detour passages TE1 and TE2 meander back and forth by these protrusions 492W and 493W, and the game ball passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2 moves sideways while meandering. As a result, the acceleration of the game ball when passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2 is alleviated. That is, the protrusions 492W and 493W in the present embodiment function as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (c), the arrangement of the first protrusion 492 W and the second protrusion 493 W will be supplementarily described.

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), when the movable body 450W is in the first guide state and the first guide path GP1 to the first ball entry portion 331 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion are formed. 493W is located outside the first guide path GP1 (that is, outside the passage region of the game ball in the first guide path GP1). Therefore, in the first guide state, the protrusions 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game balls heading toward the first ball entry portion 331 via the first guide path GP1, and the game balls are prevented from coming into contact with the protrusions 492W. , 493W will be excluded from the deceleration target.

Further, in the first guide state, the second protrusion 493W is located below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W which is inclined downward to the right side. Therefore, contact between the game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W and the second protrusion 493W is avoided. On the other hand, the first protrusion 492W is located above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that is inclined downward to the right side, and comes into contact with the game ball that falls from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. May be done. The first protrusion 492W has a ridge extending vertically, and when the game ball passes between the first protrusions 492W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the first protrusion 492W. Is stipulated in. Here, the first protrusions 492W are arranged in a direction (lateral direction) intersecting the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, the game ball whose moving direction is defined does not repeatedly collide with the first protrusion 492W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than that when the game ball is directed toward the parallel arrangement direction of the first protrusion 492W (when moving along the first detour passage TE1).

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), when the movable body 450W is in the second guide state and the second guide path GP2 to the second entry portion 341 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion 493W is located outside the second guide path GP2 (that is, outside the passage region of the game ball in the second guide path GP2). Therefore, in the second guide state, the protrusions 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game balls heading toward the second entry portion 341 via the second guide path GP2, and the game balls have the protrusions 492W. , 493W will be excluded from the deceleration target.

Further, in the second guide state, the first protrusion 492W is located below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W which is inclined downward to the left side. Therefore, contact between the game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W and the first protrusion 492W is avoided. On the other hand, the second protrusion 493W is located above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that is inclined downward to the right side, and comes into contact with the game ball that falls from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. May be done. The second protrusion 493W has a ridge extending vertically, and when the game ball passes between the second protrusions 493W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the second protrusion 493W. Is stipulated in. Here, the second protrusions 493W are arranged in a direction (lateral direction) intersecting the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, the game ball whose moving direction is defined does not repeatedly collide with the second protrusion 493W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than that when the game ball heads in the parallel direction of the second protrusion 493W (when it moves along the second detour passage TE2).

For example, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the first guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated by the collision with the movable body 450W, and further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2. Move in a restrained state. As a result, the time required for passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2 is lengthened.

Here, as shown in FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (b), when the posture of the movable body 450W changes while the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable body 450W. The game ball whose acceleration was suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W, and quickly moves toward the first ball entry portion 331. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preceding game ball from becoming a factor that hinders the movement of the succeeding game ball toward the first ball entry unit 331, and to facilitate the ball entry into the first ball entry unit 331.

When the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the second guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated by the collision with the movable body 450W, and further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2. Move in a restrained state. As a result, the time required for passing through the detour passages TE1 and TE2 is lengthened.

Here, as shown in FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (c), when the posture of the movable body 450W changes while the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable body 450W. The game ball whose acceleration was suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W, and quickly moves toward the second ball entry portion 341. As a result, it is possible to prevent the preceding game ball from becoming a factor that hinders the movement of the succeeding game ball toward the second entry portion 341, and facilitate the entry of the subsequent game ball into the second entry portion 341.

According to the 16th embodiment described in detail above, a game ball that has reached the movable body 450W during the interval period between rounds can also be given an opportunity to enter the first ball entry unit 331. As a result, it is possible to suppress irregular hits such as refraining from launching the game ball for the purpose of suppressing the generation of wasted balls during the interval period, and contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

Further, since the game ball mounted on the movable body 450W heads toward the ball entry portions 331 and 341 as the posture of the movable body 450W changes, the ball entry frequency at the start of the round increases. It is preferable to generate a difference in the frequency of ball entry during the round game in order to suppress the monotonicization of the game.

The maximum number of game balls that can be placed on the movable body 450W is 5, which is less than the upper limit (8) that is the round end condition. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the round end condition is satisfied immediately after the start of the round and the round game ends early.

When the movable body 450W is in the standby state, the detour passages TE1 and TE2 are formed on both the left and right sides of the shaft support portion 451W. This is because, as described above, the weight of the game ball changes the posture of the movable body 450W in order to delay the detachment of the game ball from the movable body 450W and prolong the time of being on the movable body 450W. It is a device to suppress the action on. For example, when the game ball is placed on the TE1 side of the first detour passage, the weight of the game ball may act so as to tilt the posture of the movable body 450W downward to the right. In such a case, when the game ball is placed on the second detour passage TE2, the weight of the game ball may act so as to hinder the above-mentioned action. As described above, it is technically significant to form the detour passages TE1 and TE2 on both sides of the shaft support portion 451W and to dispose the protrusions 492W and 493W as the deceleration means in the detour passages TE1 and TE2.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) The location of the variable winning unit 83 in the gaming area PE is arbitrary. For example, when a left route that detours the variable display unit 85 arranged in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that detours from the right side are provided as the flow path of the game ball in the game area PE. , The variable winning unit 83 may be arranged on one route and restricted so that the game ball fired on the other route cannot reach the variable winning unit 83.

(2) When another ball entry portion is arranged in a specific area SE (corresponding to a "predetermined area") sandwiched between both ball entry portions 331 and 341 in the variable winning unit 83, the other ball entry portion is used. The type is arbitrary. For example, a general winning opening 81 or a through gate 84 may be arranged.

(3) In a configuration in which a plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are provided side by side in the variable winning unit 83, it is not always necessary for the plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 to share the power unit (drive motor 321). A plurality of drive units may be provided individually corresponding to the movable bodies 350 and 360. That is, the first drive unit for the first movable body 350 and the second drive unit for the second movable body 360 may be provided separately. However, in order to promote the miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83 and improve the degree of freedom in arranging the variable winning unit 83, it is technically significant to share the power units of the plurality of movable bodies.

(4) The detection sensor 334 for the first ball entry unit 331 and the detection sensor 344 for the second ball entry unit 341 are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the ball passage 333 for the first ball entry section 331 and the ball passage 343 for the second entry section 341 are configured to merge, and a detection sensor is provided at the meeting point or a portion downstream of the joining point. It may be arranged and the detection sensor may be shared.

(5) The variable winning unit 83 is provided with a first ball entry section 331 and a second ball entry section 341, which are destinations for the game ball in the open / close execution mode, but the first ball entry section 331 and the second ball entry section 331 are provided. One of the entry sections 341 is the entry section (large winning opening) where the game ball enters in the open / close execution mode, and the other is the entry section (large winning opening) where the game ball enters in the high frequency support mode. It is also possible to use an operating port with an electric accessory).

(6) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the rotary movable body 450R is configured to be sideways in the standby state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 59, the movable body 450AA may be configured to be vertically oriented in the standby state.

For example, as shown in the thirteenth embodiment or the like, in the configuration in which the movable body 450R is always maintained in a state of protruding toward the specific region SE side, the technical idea shown in this modification is applied. The chance that the game ball collides with the movable body 450AA in the standby state can be reduced, and the movable body 450AA can be suitably protected. This is preferable in order to improve the operational stability of the movable body 450AA.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged so that the inlet portions 332 and 342 face each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the inlet portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 so as to face a direction different from the parallel direction of the ball entry portions 331 and 341. For example, as shown in the schematic view of FIG. 60, when the ball entry portions 331AB and 341AB are arranged side by side, the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB are oriented in the direction (upward) intersecting the parallel arrangement direction. May be placed.

However, in such a configuration, even if the situation is not such that the game ball should be guided to the ball entry units 331AB and 341AB such as the opening / closing execution mode, the game ball falling toward the variable winning unit 83AB is inserted. It is feared that there is a high possibility that the ball will accidentally enter the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB of the ball portions 331AB and 341AB. Therefore, in such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to dispose an obstacle such as a game nail above the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB to prevent the game ball from falling toward the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side, but the positional relationship between the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61 (a), when the variable winning unit 83AC is arranged on the side of the portion curved so as to rise to the right on the inner rail 101, the first entry on the right side. By shifting the height position so that the ball portion 331AC is above the second ball entry portion 341AC on the left side, the variable winning unit 83AC can be brought closer to the inner rail 101. This is advantageous in reducing the dead space that may occur between, for example, the inner rail 101 and the variable winning unit 83AC.

(9) In each of the first to ninth and thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the total length of the first guide path GP1 and the total length of the second guide path GP2 are made equal to each other, and the first guide path GP1 is formed. In this state, the game ball that has reached any position in the width direction in the specific area SE is targeted for guidance to the first ball entry portion 331, and in the state where the second guide path GP2 is formed, the width is in the specific area SE. The game ball that has reached any position in the direction is configured to be guided to the second entry portion 341, but the present invention is not limited to this. A difference may be provided in the game balls to be guided in the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2. For example, a game ball that has reached any position in the width direction in the specific area SE by the first guide path GP1 is targeted for guidance to the first ball entry portion 331, while the second guide path GP2 is the width in the specific area SE. Only the game ball that has reached a part of the direction (for example, the portion closer to the second entry portion 341) may be differentiated so as to be guided to the second entry portion 341.

(10) In the first, fourth, and fifth embodiments described above, a recessed portion 363 is formed in the second movable body 360, and the first movable body 350 is inserted through the recessed portion 363, thereby both. Although the configuration is such that the interference of the operation paths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is avoided, the specific configuration for avoiding the interference of the operation paths of both the movable bodies 350 and 360 is arbitrary.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61B, the first notch portion 353AD that is open to the rear end side and extends to the front end side of the first movable body 350AD is provided in the central portion of the first movable body 350AD. A constriction is formed in the central portion, and the central portion of the second movable body 360AD is constricted by providing a second notch portion 363AD that is open to the front end side of the second movable body 360AD and extends to the rear end side. To form. Then, the constriction of the second movable body 360AD is inserted into the first notch portion 353AD, and the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is inserted into the second notch portion 363AD so that the first movable body 350AD is inserted. And the second movable body 360AD are combined. When the first movable body 350AD moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is displaced to the opening destination of the second notch portion 363AD of the second movable body 360AD, and the second movable body When the 360AD moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, the constriction of the second movable body 360AD is configured to be displaced in the first notch portion 353AD of the first movable body 350AD. This makes it possible to prevent one of the two movable bodies 350AD and 360AD from hindering the movement of the other.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration in which the variable winning unit 83 includes the drive motor 321 as the drive unit for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360 is illustrated, but the drive unit does not necessarily have to be a motor. It may be configured to include other driving means such as a solenoid.

Here, in order to operate the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 individually by using one solenoid, it is preferable to use another actuator to switch the power transmission path of the solenoid. Further, the plunger of the solenoid stands by at the initial position in the non-excited state, moves to the first operating position in the first excited state, and moves to the first operating position in the second excited state, and in the second excited state, the second operating position opposite to the first operating position. The first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position with the movement to the first operating position, and the second movable body 360 moves with the movement to the second operating position. It may be configured to move from the retracted position to the protruding position.

Further, as shown in the fifth embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode, the first ball entry unit 331 and the second ball entry unit 341 are alternately set as guide destinations for the game ball (provided that they are set). In the case where the number of rounds is assumed to be an even number), the power transmission path may be switched between the first movable body 350 side and the second movable body 360 side each time the solenoid is driven.

(12) In the first to fifth embodiments, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged so as to intersect each other, but the first movable body 350 forming the first guide path GP1 is formed. In order to regulate the movement of the game ball toward the second entry section 341 and to regulate the movement of the game ball toward the first entry section 331 by the second movable body 360 forming the second guide path GP2. , The above arrangement is not mandatory. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 62 (a), the first movable body 350AE and the second movable body 360AE can be arranged so as to form a y-shape.

(13) In the tenth embodiment, the operating regions of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the first guide path GP1 and the operating regions of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when forming the second guide path GP2. In the fifteenth embodiment, the operating region of the movable body 470V when forming the first guide path GP1 and the operating region of the movable body 470V when forming the second guide path GP2 are Overlapping configuration. Considering that the operation area for switching to each guidance state is shared, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 62B, the operation area of the first movable body 350AF for the first ball entry portion 331 and the second operation area are used. It is also possible to have a configuration that overlaps with the operating area of the second movable body 360AF for the ball entry portion 341. It is sufficient if at least the operation areas are overlapped, and it is not always necessary to configure the first guide path GP1 and the second guide path GP2 to overlap.

(14) In the tenth embodiment, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by using a plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, the movable bodies 430N, which form the upstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, The movement of the 440N and the movements of the movable bodies 430N and 440N forming the downstream portion are synchronized with each other. Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the first guide path GP1 is formed by using the plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L, the upper left movable plate 401L constituting the upstream portion of the first guide path GP1 protrudes. The lower right movable plate 402L constituting the downstream part of the first guide path GP1 is moved to a close position (corresponding to the "passage forming position") under the condition of being arranged at the position (corresponding to the "passage forming position"). It was configured to be used. The operation timing of each movable body when forming a guide path using a plurality of movable bodies is arbitrary. For example, a movable body forming a downstream part of a guide path is formed as a passage prior to a movable body forming an upstream part. It is also possible to place it in a position.

(15) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the total length of the first movable body 450P (the length from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip portion) and the total length of the second movable body 460P are the same. However, it is not limited to this. When the movable bodies 450P and 460P are rotatable, a force that rotates the movable bodies 450P and 460P is applied by the collision of the game balls. When the first movable body 450P is arranged at the passage forming position, the guide groove prevents further rotation, so that the posture change can be avoided even if the first movable body 450P is pushed by the game ball. On the other hand, when the second movable body 460P is arranged at the passage forming position, the guide groove prevents further rotation, but the direction in which the rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is It is opposite to the rotation regulation direction. That is, the guide groove for the second movable body 360P cannot be expected to be restricted from rotating due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, the second movable body 360P, which is easily affected by the collision of the game ball, is configured to have a shorter overall length than the first movable body 350P, so that the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

(16) In the first embodiment described above, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are configured to intersect at the central portion of the movable bodies 350 and 360, but the intersection is arbitrary. For example, it may be biased toward the first ball entry portion 331 side or may be biased toward the second ball entry portion 341 side.

It is not always necessary to match the height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end of both movable bodies 350 and 360 with the vertical width of the inlet portion 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, but at least in the protruding position. It suffices if the configuration is such that it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the entrance portion on the side other than the guide destination in the arranged state. Further, the width of the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the juxtaposed direction of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is formed to be equivalent to the separation distance between the inlet portions 332 and 342 of both ball entry portions 331 and 341. It may be configured to match the lengths.

When the upstream end of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is extended above the specific region SE, the width of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is configured to be longer than the separation distance of the inlet portions 332 and 342. You may. However, in order to increase the receiving width of the game ball (make the inflow port OE look larger) while reducing the size of the variable winning unit 83, it is technically significant to fit the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the specific area SE. be.

(17) In the first embodiment or the like, the inclination angle of the first guide path GP1 with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second guide path GP2 with respect to the horizontal plane are made to match, and the passage of the guide paths GP1 and GP2. It is configured so that the required period required for the above is the same, but the required period is not limited to this. One guide path may be configured to have a larger inclination angle than the other guide path, and the required period may be different. When the difference in the inclination angle is provided in this way, the difference also occurs in the moving speed of the game ball. Therefore, the movable body on the side having a large inclination angle is provided with the recessed portion 363, and the movable body on the side having a small inclination angle is not provided with the recessed portion 363, so that it is preferable to reduce the guiding function of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment or the like, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350, and the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360. The configuration is such that the inclination angle of the 1 movable body 350 (upper surface 351) with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second movable body 360 (upper surface 361) with respect to the horizontal plane are matched, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the second movable body does not have the function of forming the guide path, the inclination angle of the second movable body can be made larger than the inclination angle of the first movable body. Thereby, the function of restricting the movement of the game ball along the first guide path GP1 by the second movable body can be suitably enhanced.

(19) There is a difference between the privilege given to the player based on the entry into the first ball entry section 331 and the benefit given to the player based on the entry into the second entry section 341. If this is the case, it is assumed that the player expects the game to proceed in an advantageous manner, that is, to enter the ball entry section on the side with many benefits to be granted. Therefore, in such a configuration, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged at the protruding positions, the game ball is temporarily fixed in the specific area SE, and then the movable body that moves to the evacuation position is specified. By making it difficult, it can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game. That is, when the first movable body 350 is arranged in the protruding position while the second movable body 360 is arranged in the protruding position, the operation pattern is that the second movable body 360 is subsequently moved to the retracted position. It may be used in combination with an operation pattern in which the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position. Further, in place of or in addition to this, when the second movable body 360 is arranged in the protruding position while the first movable body 350 is arranged in the protruding position, the first movable body is subsequently arranged. It is advisable to use both the operation pattern in which the 350 moves to the retracted position and the operation pattern in which the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position.

(20) As shown in the above embodiment, it is not always necessary to provide a difference in the number of prize balls in order to provide a difference in advantage between the first ball entry unit 331 and the second ball entry unit 341. For example, when the number of prize balls is the same, the game state of one of the ball entry portions is changed to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the current game state (for example, a game state corresponding to the low probability mode). ) May be made to fall or a fall lottery may be performed to provide a difference in advantage.

(21) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and becomes a big hit, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball entry section variable and switching between a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the ball entry section and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed. For example, regarding the background technology of "see Patent Document 1)", "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry portion in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made in consideration of the background and issues.

Features A1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (for example, the first entry section 331) and a second entry section (for example, the second entry section 341) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters.
Guidance means capable of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section (for example, first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, second movable body 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, 1st guide unit 400L-400M, 2nd guide unit 410L-410M, movable body 450R-450U, 450W, 470V, 450AA)
When the guiding means is in the first state, a first guiding path (for example, the first guiding path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed.
When the guiding means is in the second state, a second guiding path (for example, the second guiding path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry devices having a guide means and a ball entry portion in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. It is feared that such limitation of arrangement may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide path and the second guide path formed by the guide means intersect each other, and a part of the guide paths is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the ball entry device and preferably exert an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the destination of the game ball is reversed while partially overlapping the guide paths, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the game ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A2. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (for example, the first entry section 331) and a second entry section (for example, the second entry section 341) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters.
A first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, the first guide portion 400L to 400M) that can operate in a predetermined range including the first position (for example, a protruding position).
It is provided with a second movable body (for example, second movable body 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide portion 410L to 410M) that can operate in a predetermined range including a second position (for example, a protruding position).
By arranging the first movable body at the first position, a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion is formed.
By arranging the second movable body at the second position, a second guide path (for example, the second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed.
The first position and the second position are set so that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect with each other when viewed from the front of the game machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry devices having a movable body and a ball entry portion in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. It is feared that such limitation of arrangement may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide path and the second guide path formed by the guide means intersect each other, and a part of the guide paths is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the ball entry device and preferably exert an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the destination of the game ball is reversed while partially overlapping the guide paths, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the game ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "a gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. The first ball entry section (for example, the first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, the first guide section 400L to 400M), the second ball entry section (for example, the second ball entry section 341), and the first entry section. First guide means (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide unit 400L to 400M) that can be switched between a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the ball portion and a non-guidance state without the guidance. ) And the second guiding means (for example, the second movable body 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, which can be switched between the guiding state for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion and the non-guiding state without the guidance. A first inclined surface (for example, a first guide) that is provided with the second guide portions 410L to 410M) and guides the game ball to the first ball entry portion in the game area when the first guide means is in the guide state. The path GP1) is formed, and the second guiding means is in the guiding state, so that a second inclined surface (for example, the second guiding path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed in the gaming area. The first inclined surface and the second inclined surface are configured to intersect each other in the front view of the gaming machine. "

Further, the configuration shown in this feature is "a gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. The first ball entry section (for example, the first entry section 331) and the second entry section (for example, the second entry section 341), the guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first entry section, and the guidance thereof are performed. The game ball is guided to the first guide means (for example, the first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, the first guide unit 400L to 400M) that can be switched to the non-guidance state, and the second ball entry unit. The guide state is provided with a second guide means (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide units 410L to 410M) that can be switched between a guidance state and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed. The first projection area when the first guiding means is projected from the front side of the gaming machine to the rear, and the second guiding means when the second guiding means in the guided state is projected from the front side of the gaming machine to the rear. (2) A gaming machine characterized in that the projection areas intersect with each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. "

Further, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, which is provided in the game area, and a game ball enters the ball. First ball entry section (for example, first entry section 331) and second entry section (for example, second entry section 341), and a first position (for example, a protruding position) that can be operated in a predetermined range. A second movable body that can operate within a predetermined range including one movable body (for example, first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide portion 400L to 400M) and a second position (for example, a protruding position). (For example, the second movable body 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, the second guide portion 410L to 410M) is provided, and the first movable body is arranged at the first position, so that the first ball entry portion is provided. A first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to is formed, and the second movable body is arranged at the second position to guide the game ball to the second entry portion. A second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) is formed, and in the first position and the second position, the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the first position and the second position. It is also possible to say, "A game machine characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path are set to intersect each other."

Feature A3. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (for example, first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide section 400L to 400M) and a second ball entry section (for example, first movable body 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide section 400L to 400M) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters. 2nd ball entry section 341) and
A first movable body (first movable body 350) that can operate within a predetermined range including the first position (protruding position), and
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, a second guide portion 410L to 410M) that can operate in a predetermined range including a second position (protruding position).
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot result corresponding to the first winning mode is obtained), the first movable body is located at the first position, and when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second winning mode). With a switching means (MPU of the main control device 162) for switching the arrangement of the first movable body and the second movable body so that the second movable body is located at the second position when the corresponding jackpot result is obtained). Equipped with
By arranging the first movable body at the first position, a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion is formed.
By arranging the second movable body at the second position, a second guide path (for example, the second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed.
The first position and the second position are set so that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect with each other when viewed from the front of the game machine.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry devices having a movable body and a ball entry portion in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. It is feared that such limitation of arrangement may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention described above.

In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide path and the second guide path formed by the guide means intersect each other, and a part of the guide paths is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the ball entry device and preferably exert an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game. Further, since the destination of the game ball is reversed while partially overlapping the guide paths, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the game ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A4. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive a game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball so as to change the flow direction of the game ball.
The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path intersect at an intermediate portion of the first guide path and an intermediate portion of the second guide path.

If both guide paths are configured to intersect at the intermediate portion of the guide paths, the overall length of the guide paths (the receiving width of the game ball) can be increased, and the resulting increase in the size of the ball entry device can be suitably suppressed. ..

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "The first guide path and the second guide path have the same passage length on the upstream side of the intersection and the passage length on the downstream side of the intersection. The gaming machine according to the feature A2 or the feature A3, which is characterized by being formed in. ”.

Incidentally, it is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in this feature to feature A1. In this case, the configuration shown in the present feature is as follows: "The guidance means receives the game ball flowing down the game area and changes the flow direction of the game ball to change the flow direction of the game ball, and performs the guidance. The gaming machine according to feature A1 is characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect at the intermediate portion of the route and the intermediate portion of the second guide path. "

Feature A5. The feature A4 is characterized in that the first movable body and the second movable body are formed so that the total length of the first guide path and the total length of the second guide path are the same or substantially the same. The described gaming machine.

If the overall lengths of both guide paths are made equal to each other as shown in the feature A5, the effect shown in the feature A4 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature A6. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive a game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball so as to change the flow direction of the game ball.
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction.
The intersection of the first guide path and the second guide path is located between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A5.

As shown in the feature A6, if the intersection of both guide paths is located between the entry portions in the parallel direction of both entry portions, the total length of the guide path (the receiving width of the game ball) can be obtained. It is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball entry device due to the increase in size.

Feature A7. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive a game ball flowing down the game area and guide the game ball so as to change the flow direction of the game ball.
The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side, and the inlet portions (for example, inlet portions 332, 342) of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section face each other with a predetermined region in between. It is arranged in this way,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A6, wherein the intersection of the first guide path and the second guide path is located in the predetermined area.

When the two entry portions are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other as shown in the feature A7, the intersection of the first guide path and the second guide path is set in a predetermined area to guide the ball. While increasing the total length of the path (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball entry device due to the increase.

Feature A8. The first guide path is inclined so as to go down to the first ball entry portion side.
The second guide path is inclined so as to descend toward the second entry portion.
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path are formed in the predetermined region.

As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the guide path is tilted downward toward each entry portion to guide the game ball, the moving speed of the game ball depends on the tilt angle. If the technical idea shown in the feature A2 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the inclination angle can be increased to some extent while increasing the total length of the guide path (the receiving width of the game ball). Therefore, by forming the guide path in the predetermined region, it is possible to promote the miniaturization of the ball entry device and preferably suppress the failure of the guide function or the like to be exerted well due to the miniaturization of the ball entry device.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the inclination angle of the first guide path with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second guide path with respect to the horizontal plane are the same or substantially the same.

As shown in the feature A8, if both guide paths are formed in a predetermined region, the miniaturization of the ball entry device can be suitably realized.

Feature A10. In the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the vertical width of the entrance portions of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is the entrance portion of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. It is configured to be smaller than the distance between them.
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, wherein the angle formed by the first guide path and the second guide path is configured to be an obtuse angle on the upper side and the lower side.

When the predetermined region is configured to be horizontally long as shown in the feature A10, it is preferable to configure the angle formed by both guide paths to be an obtuse angle. As a result, while increasing the total length of the guide path (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball entry device due to the increase.

Feature A11. The first guide path and the second guide path are configured to move the game ball along the front surface of the game board.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A10, wherein the first movable body and the second movable body can slide and move in the thickness direction of the gaming board.

As shown in the feature A2 and the like, in the configuration in which the first guide path formed by the first movable body and the second guide path formed by the second movable body intersect, the presence of the guide path on one side is present. It can be a factor that hinders the movement of the movable body on the other side. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the first movable body is arranged at the first position, at least a part of the first movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board, so that the first guide path is formed. When the second movable body is formed and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, at least a part of the second movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board to form the second guide path. With such a configuration, the existence of the first guide path may be a factor that hinders the movement of the second movable body, or the existence of the second guide path may be a factor that hinders the movement of the first movable body. It can be suitably suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suitably alleviate the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the operation timing of the first movable body and the second movable body.

In addition, when each guide path is formed in a predetermined area as shown in feature A8, by applying the configuration (sliding back and forth of the movable body) shown in this feature, the motion area of the movable body from the predetermined area can be obtained. The protrusion can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A12. One of the first movable body and the second movable body is formed with an insertion portion (for example, a recessed portion 363) through which the other of the first movable body and the second movable body is inserted, and the insertion portion is formed. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first movable body and the second movable body are configured to intersect with each other.

In the configuration in which both movable bodies are slid and moved in the thickness direction of the game board as shown in the feature A10, an insertion portion is formed in one movable body as shown in this feature, and the other movable body is formed in this insertion portion. It is advisable to cross both movable bodies by inserting them. In such a configuration, the insertion portion functions as an operating region of the other movable body. This makes it possible to preferably prevent one movable body from hindering the movement of the other movable body in realizing the configuration in which the guide paths intersect as described above.

Feature A13. The first movable body and the second movable body have a flat plate shape, and one plate surface of the first movable body forms a rolling surface of a game ball in the first guide path, and the second movable body is formed. The rolling surface of the game ball in the second guide path is formed by one plate surface of the movable body.
Of the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness dimension of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed is formed to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the gaming ball. The gaming machine according to the feature A12.

In a configuration in which the movable body has a flat plate shape and the rolling surface of the game ball in the guide path is formed by the plate surface, a blank is generated on the rolling surface (intersection point) by the insertion portion. If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball will spill through the blank, and the guidance function may deteriorate. Therefore, as shown in this feature, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness of the movable body (the movable body on the side inserted through the insertion portion) in which the insertion portion is not formed. By forming the dimension so as to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Feature A14. The first privilege granting means for granting the first privilege to the player based on the entry into the first ball entry portion,
A second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege to the player based on the entry into the second ball entry portion is provided.
The first privilege is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second privilege.
The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided in the two movable bodies.

When there is a difference in the superiority of each ball entry portion as shown in the feature A14, the player's game is that the game ball is not smoothly guided for the ball entry section on the side that is advantageous to the player. It is expected to be a factor that reduces motivation, or a factor that makes it difficult to differentiate the game by reducing the superiority of the first ball entry section. Therefore, if the above-mentioned blank is generated not in the first guide path toward the first entry section where the privilege given is large but in the second guide path toward the second entry section where the privilege given is small, various of them. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A15. The first movable body forms a first rolling surface of the first guide path that is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion.
The second movable body forms a second rolling surface of the second guide path that is inclined downward to the second ball entry portion.
The tilt angle of the second rolling surface is larger than the tilt angle of the first rolling surface.
The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided in the second movable body.

When the inclination angle is small, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide path tends to be small. Therefore, whether or not the insertion portion can be moved so as to jump over the insertion portion is likely to be affected by the size of the insertion portion. In order to effectively exert the guidance function by the movable body, it is technically significant to arrange the insertion portion on the movable body on the side having a large inclination angle as shown in this feature.

Feature A16. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, the portion of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed and inserted into the insertion portion is a thin portion having a thickness smaller than that of other portions in the movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A12 to the feature A15, which is characterized in that.

As shown in the feature A12, in a configuration in which a blank is generated on the rolling surface, the behavior of the game ball may be disturbed when passing through the blank. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if at least the inserted portion is made thinner, the inserted portion itself can be made smaller, and as a result, the blank can be reduced. Thereby, the disorder of the behavior of the game ball can be suitably reduced.

Feature A17. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the thin-walled portion is formed by denting the lower surface of the movable body in which the thin-walled portion is formed among the first movable body and the second movable body. ..

If the lower surface is recessed to form a thin-walled portion as shown in the feature A17, the rolling surface can be smoothed even for the movable body to which the thin-walled portion is arranged, and the behavior of the game ball is disturbed. Can be suitably avoided.

Feature A18. When the first guide path is provided at an intersection of the first guide path and the second guide path and the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the first guide path is formed together with the first movable body. The second movable body is provided with a path forming portion (core 390F, 390G) that forms the second guide path together with the second movable body when the second movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A11.

According to the feature A18, the gap generated at the intersection can be reduced. As a result, smooth guidance of the game ball can be realized in realizing the crossing arrangement shown in the feature A1 or the like.

Feature A19. The first movable body and the second movable body have a flat plate shape.
In the state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first movable body is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion.
In the state where the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second movable body is inclined downward to the second ball entry portion.
The path forming portion is
A first inclined portion (for example, the first inclined portion 391F) constituting the rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide path together with the upper plate surface in the first movable body.
A feature characterized by having a second inclined portion (for example, a second inclined portion 392F) constituting a rolling surface of a game ball in the second guide path together with an upper plate surface in the second movable body. The gaming machine according to A18.

According to the feature A19, the smoothing of each rolling surface (inclined surface) is realized by providing the first inclined portion according to the first movable body and providing the second inclined portion according to the second movable body. Above, the restrictions on the orientation of the guide passage and the like can be suitably relaxed.

Feature A20. The first movable body has a first accommodating portion (for example, a notch 353F) for accommodating the second inclined portion in a state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position.
The second movable body has a second accommodating portion (for example, a recessed portion 363F) for accommodating the first inclined portion in a state where the second movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to the feature A19.

According to the feature A20, an unnecessary portion (inclined portion) in the path forming portion is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the behavior of the game ball from being disturbed due to the game ball being caught in an unnecessary portion.

Feature A21. The path forming portion is movable to a protruding position protruding into the game area and a retracted position in which the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide path nor the second guide path is formed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A18 to A20, which is configured to stand by at the retracted position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide path is not formed, the path forming portion is suppressed from protruding into the game area. This makes it possible to reduce the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the path forming portion. By protecting the path forming portion in this way, when the guiding path is formed by the path forming portion and the movable body, the relative positions of the two may vary and the game ball may not be guided smoothly. Can be suppressed.

Feature A22. When the first movable body moves to the first position, the path forming portion moves to the protruding position following the first movable body, and the second movable body moves to the second position. The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the gaming machine is configured to follow the second movable body and move to the protruding position.

When the path forming portion is of the infestation type as shown in the feature A21, the path forming portion moves to the protruding position following the movement of each movable body to the guide position (first position or second position). With the configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the formation timing of the guide passage and the like.

Feature A23. The moving direction of the first movable body and the second movable body is the same as the moving direction of the path forming portion.
The first movable body is provided with a first acting portion (for example, an arm portion 355G) that moves the path forming portion to the protruding position when the first movable body moves to the first position.
The second movable body is provided with a second acting portion (for example, an arm portion 365G) that moves the path forming portion to the protruding position when the second movable body moves to the second position. The gaming machine according to the feature A21 or the feature A22.

If the path forming portion is of the infestation type as described above, various effects such as protection of the path forming portion can be expected. However, the fact that a drive unit for driving the path forming unit is required separately hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the ball entry device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the moving directions of each movable body and the path forming portion are unified, and the path forming portion is newly pushed to the protruding position by the acting portion provided on each movable body. There is no need to add a drive unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive complication of the configuration of the ball entry device and contribute to the miniaturization of the ball entry device.

Feature A24. When the first movable body is placed in the first position and the second movable body is moved from one of the states placed in the second position to the other, the first movable body is placed in the protruding position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A21 to A23, wherein the path forming portion is passed from one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the other at the protruding position.

Considering that the path forming portion moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, the game ball may be caught when it is arranged at the protruding position. Therefore, when switching from the state in which the guide path is formed together with one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the state in which the guide path is formed together with the other, the return to the retracted position of the route forming portion is avoided. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience by adopting a configuration in which (for example, it is kept in a protruding position).

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "when the first movable body is arranged in the first position and the second movable body is arranged in the second position from one of the two to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A21 to the feature A23, characterized in that the movement of the path forming portion arranged at the protruding position to the retracted position is avoided. " Is.

Feature A25. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side and the entrance portions (entrance portions 332, 342) are arranged so as to face each other.
The features A21 to the feature A21 to be characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A24.

As shown in this feature, if the ball entry portions are arranged so as to face each other and a guide path is formed in the region sandwiched by the ball entry portions, the miniaturization of the ball entry device can be promoted. In such a configuration, when the route forming portion is used for both guide paths, the following inconvenience occurs if the path forming portion remains in the above region when the guide path is not formed. That is, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the region may bounce off the path forming portion and head toward the entry portion. In this respect, if the path forming portion is a haunting type as shown in the feature A21 or the like, such movement of the game ball can be suitably avoided, and the game ball is not guided to the entry part. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a ball entering the ball entry portion.

Feature A26. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged so that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other.
By arranging the first movable body at the first position, an inclined surface that constitutes the bottom of the first guide path by the upper surface of the first movable body and is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion is formed. Formed,
By arranging the second movable body at the second position, an inclined surface that constitutes the bottom of the second guide path by the upper surface of the second movable body and is inclined downward to the second ball entry portion is formed. Formed,
An inflow portion (a region between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion, in which a game ball can flow into the region below the first movable body and the second movable body). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A25, which is characterized in that it is an arrangement area of (for example, an out port 86, a lower operating port 92, etc.).

According to the feature A26, when the upper surface of the first movable body and the upper surface of the second movable body form the bottom of the guide path, the region above the first movable body and the upper side from the second movable body. The area of is a passing area when guiding the game ball to the first and second ball entry portions. On the other hand, in the area below both movable bodies, the passage of the game ball is basically avoided when guiding the game ball.

Therefore, if the inflow portion is arranged in this region, the first / second ball entry portion and the inflow portion can be suitably coexisted. In addition, the movement of the movable body affects whether or not the ball can enter the inflow portion, which can contribute to the diversification of the game.

It is also possible to use the "inflow section" shown in this feature as the "third ball entry section".

Feature A27. The predetermined range in which the first movable body moves includes a standby position in which the protrusion of the game ball between the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion into the passing region is suppressed.
The predetermined range in which the second movable body moves includes a standby position in which protrusion to the passing region is suppressed.
A game state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
A means for moving at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the first position and the second position when the gaming state becomes the second gaming state.
The gaming machine according to feature A26, which comprises means for making the first movable body and the second movable body stand by at the standby position when the first gaming state is set.

By using the ball entry section and the inflow section together, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the ball entry device. However, in such a configuration, if the ball entering the inflow section cannot be expected substantially, the significance of using the ball entry section and the inflow section together is diminished. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first game state, both the first movable body and the second movable body remain in the standby position, and the movement of the game ball is restricted by the first movable body and the second movable body. It will be released. As described above, in at least in the first gaming state, by allowing the inflow of the game ball passing between the two inflow portions into the inflow portion, it is possible to preferably prevent the significance of the existence of the inflow portion from being lowered.

Feature A28. Any of the features A1 to A27 characterized in that the first movable body is provided with a means for arranging the second movable body at the second position under the situation where the first movable body is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature A28, after forming the first guide path and guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion, the first guide path is cut off by arranging the second movable body at the second position. .. This makes it impossible to enter the first ball entry section. By arranging the second movable body at the second position, the second guide path is also formed. That is, the second movable body has both a function of determining whether or not the ball can enter the first ball entry portion and a function of forming a guide path to the second ball entry portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the attention of the player by realizing a novel guidance mode that has never existed before, and it is possible to suitably suppress the delay in the progress of the game due to the diversification of movements. ..

Feature A29. A means for arranging the second movable body in the second position in a situation where the first movable body is arranged in the first position, and a means for arranging the second movable body in the second position.
The feature A1 to the feature A28, which comprises means for arranging the first movable body in the first position in a situation where the second movable body is arranged in the second position. The gaming machine described in any one.

According to the feature A29, after forming the first guide path and guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion, the second guide path is cut off by arranging the second movable body at the second position. .. This makes it impossible to enter the first ball entry section. By arranging the second movable body at the second position, the second guide path is also formed. That is, the second movable body has both a function of determining whether or not the ball can enter the first ball entry portion and a function of forming a guide path to the second ball entry portion. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the attention of the player by realizing a novel guidance mode that has never existed before, and it is possible to suitably suppress the delay in the progress of the game due to the diversification of movements. ..

Feature A30. A drive unit (drive motor 321) for driving the first movable body and the second movable body,
It is provided with a drive control unit (MPU of the main control device 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit.
By putting the drive unit into the first drive state by the drive control unit, the first movable body is moved to the first position, and by putting the drive unit into the second drive state, the second movable body is moved. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A29, which is configured to be moved to the second position.

If the movable body to be driven is switched according to the drive state of the drive unit, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive unit for each movable body, which can suitably contribute to the miniaturization of the ball entry device.

Feature A31. The drive unit is a motor.
The feature A30 is characterized in that the drive control unit is configured to rotate the drive unit in the forward direction in the first drive state and to rotate the drive unit in the reverse direction in the second drive state. The described gaming machine.

In order to embody the technical idea shown in the feature A30, a motor may be adopted as the drive unit as shown in the present feature, and the rotation direction of the motor may be switched in the forward and reverse directions.

Feature A32. The predetermined range in which the first movable body and the second movable body move includes a standby position in which the protrusion of the game board to the front side is suppressed.
The first movable body and the second movable body form a part of the front surface of the game board by being arranged at the standby position.
When the first movable body is moved between the standby position and the first position, power transmission to the second movable body is avoided, and the second movable body is moved to the standby position and the first position. The gaming machine according to feature A30 or feature A31, characterized in that the transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided when moving between the two positions.

When a part of the front surface of the game board is formed (complemented) by the first movable body (for example, the end face) and the second movable body (for example, the end face) arranged in the standby position, the first movable body (for example, the end face) passes in front of the movable body. It is possible to suppress the catching of the game ball and the disorder of the behavior of the game ball. When the drive unit is shared in such a configuration, if one of the movable bodies is moved by the other movable body, the other movable body moves, for example, retracts from the standby position to perform the above-mentioned complementary function. Is worried that it will not be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the configuration so as to avoid the transmission of power to the other movable body when moving one movable body.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of gaming by the variable ball-entry means." It is a thing.

Feature B1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83) capable of entering a gaming ball in the gaming area. There,
The ball entry means
A first ball entry portion (for example, a first ball entry portion) arranged side by side in a predetermined direction (for example, in the left-right direction) and having an entrance portion (for example, an entrance portion 332, 342) facing each other across a predetermined region (specific region SE). With the ball entry section 331) and the second ball entry section (for example, the second ball entry section 341),
The first guide state for guiding the gaming ball that has reached the predetermined area to the first ball entry section, the second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second entry section, the first ball entry section, and the second entry state. A gaming machine characterized by having a guiding means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360) capable of switching to a non-guidance state in which the gaming ball is not guided to any of the ball portions.

It is easier to give the player the impression that it is easier to enter the ball when the size of the entry portion is larger than when the size is smaller. Although it is possible to diversify the game by using a plurality of ball entry sections in combination, if a large ball entry section is to be arranged as each ball entry section for the above reason, the ball entry section will be occupied in the game area. Inconveniences such as bulking of the area occur. Therefore, in this feature, a predetermined area sandwiched between the first ball entry section and the second entry section is used as an introduction area for introducing a game ball into each entry section (that is, the introduction area is shared). By guiding the game ball that has reached a predetermined area to each entry section by a guiding means, the first entry section and the second entry section can be miniaturized while the first entry section and the second entry section themselves are miniaturized. The gaps between the ball portions (inflow points to the predetermined area (inflow port OE)) can be made to appear as if they were entrances to the ball entry portions. As a result, it is possible to make the actually small ball entry portion look larger than it actually is. It is advantageous to give the player the impression that it is easy to enter the ball and to improve the motivation to play by using the two entry portions in combination to increase the appearance of the entrance.

Feature B2. A first privilege (for example, 15 prize balls) is given to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entry section, and the game ball has entered the second entry section. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a privilege granting means (payout device 224) for granting a second privilege (for example, 10 prize balls) to the player based on the above.

It is preferable to use a plurality of ball entry portions having different benefits as shown in this feature in order to realize diversification of the game. However, by arranging a plurality of types of ball entry portions in the game area, there is a concern that the arrangement area of other game parts will be compressed and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry portions will be strengthened. In this regard, by applying the technical idea shown in the feature B1, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B3. In the first ball entry section and the second entry section, the distance between the first entry section and the second entry section is the first entry section and the second entry section in the front view of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, which is configured to be larger than the opening width of the entrance portion (entrance portion 332, 342) of the above.

As shown in feature B1, in order to make the gap between the ball entry portions (the inflow point to the predetermined area (inflow port OE)) appear to be the inlet portion, the gap is the opening of the inlet portion of each ball entry portion. It is preferable to configure it so that it is larger than the width. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the apparent entrance while promoting the miniaturization of the actual ball entry portion, and it is possible to suitably exert the effect shown in the feature B1.

Regarding the "separation distance" between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the length of the boundary portion on the upstream side in the inflow direction in which the game ball flows into the predetermined region, for example, the game ball is from above. In the inflow configuration, the size of the gap between the upper part of the first ball entry portion and the upper part of the second ball entry portion is shown.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B3, wherein the guiding means is arranged at the predetermined area or a position overlapping the predetermined area in the front-rear direction.

By suppressing the exposure of the guiding means to the outside of the predetermined area, it is possible to suitably exert the visual effect of impressing the gap between the two ball entry portions as the entrance portion as shown in the feature B1.

Feature B5. The guide means is held so as to be slidable in the thickness direction of the game board, and in the first guide state, the first guide protrudes into the predetermined area and is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion. A path (first guide path GP1) is formed, and in the second guide state, a second guide path (second guide path GP2) that protrudes into the predetermined region and inclines downward toward the second ball entry portion is formed. However, the gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B4, which is configured to be arranged in a retracted position in which the protrusion to the predetermined area is avoided in the non-guided state.

As shown in this feature, if the guiding means is slid in the thickness direction of the game board to form a guiding path, it is possible to suitably suppress the operating area of the guiding means from expanding beyond the predetermined area. As a result, as shown in the feature B1, the visual effect of impressing the gap between the two ball entry portions as the entrance portion can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first guide path and the second guide path extend over the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section.

It is assumed that the game ball that has reached the predetermined area in the first guide state and the second guide state passes through the predetermined area as it is, which hinders the impression that the gap between the ball entry portions is the entrance. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if each guide path is formed so as to straddle both ball entry portions and the game ball that has reached the gap is avoided from passing through, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. ..

Feature B7. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.
The first guide path is inclined downward from the second ball entry portion side to the first ball entry section side, and the second guide path is from the first ball entry section side to the second ball entry section side. It is configured to have a downward slope,
The height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end in the first guide path is formed to be the same as or substantially the same as the vertical width of the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion.
The height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end in the second guide path is formed so as to be the same as or substantially the same as the vertical width of the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to the feature B6.

In the configuration in which the game ball is guided to the entry portion by the inclination of the guidance path, if the inclination is gentle, the period required for the guidance becomes long, and if the inclination is increased, the vertical width becomes large. Therefore, by adjusting the horizontal width to the distance between the two ball entry portions and aligning the height difference with the vertical width of the ball entry section, the guidance path is maximized so as to fit in the predetermined area sandwiched between the two entry ball portions, and the guidance path is maximized. Can be realized.

Feature B8. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction.
In the first guide state, the first guide path is formed between the portion forming the inlet (inlet OE) to the predetermined region and the inlet portion of the second ball entry portion in the predetermined region. In the second guide state, the second guide path is formed between the inflow port and the inlet portion of the first ball entry portion. The described gaming machine.

When the two entry portions are arranged side by side and the entrance portions are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that the entry into the entry portion other than the guide destination will occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, each guide path is formed so as to block the inflow port (inflow portion) of the predetermined region and the inlet portion of the ball entry portion that is not the guide destination, so that the ball enters the ball that is not the guide destination. It is possible to preferably avoid entering the ball.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "when the first guide path is formed, the movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the second entry portion is restricted by the first guide path, and the first guide path is restricted. When the two guide paths are formed, any one of the features B1 to B7 characterized in that the movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion is restricted by the second guide path. It is also possible to say "the gaming machine described in one."

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the ball-entry means has a cover portion that covers the predetermined area from the front of the gaming machine.

When the gap between both ball entry portions (inflow point to the predetermined area) is made to appear as an entrance portion as shown in the feature B1, the inflow point such as the predetermined area or the entrance portion of each ball entry portion is described. It is not preferable that the parts other than the above are conspicuous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the cover portion covers these configurations, the visibility can be lowered and the effect shown in the feature B1 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature B10. One of the feature B1 to the feature B9 characterized in that a part of the region where the first guide path is formed and the region where the second guide path is formed overlap in the predetermined region. The described gaming machine.

In the configuration in which the first guide path and the second guide path are formed in a predetermined area, by allowing a part of the two guide paths to overlap, a gap between both ball entry portions (inflow point to the predetermined area) is created. It is possible to earn a guide target from the passing game ball, and both guide routes can be suitably coexisted within a limited range.

Feature B11. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) provided in the game area where the game ball enters.
With a guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched between a first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion. Equipped with
The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged so that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332, 342) face each other with the predetermined region (specific region SE) interposed therebetween, and the game reaches the predetermined region. The ball is configured to enter the first entry section and the second entry section via the predetermined area.
The predetermined area is a gaming machine characterized in that the guide means is an operation area in which the guide means operates when the guide means is switched between the first guide state and the second guide state.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry units (ball entry devices) in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game parts in the game area.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section through the predetermined area. In this predetermined area, it becomes difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts. Therefore, by using a predetermined area sandwiched between the two ball entry portions as the operation area of the guide means, a dead space in which other game parts cannot be placed around the ball entry device in order to secure the operation area is created. It can be suppressed. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entry device can be suitably improved.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "a gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. The first ball entry section (first ball entry section 331), the second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341), and the first ball entry section (first ball entry section) provided in the game area where the game ball enters. A first guide state that forms a first guide path (first guide path GP1) that guides a game ball to the first ball entry section with the ball entry section 331) and the second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341). And a guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) capable of switching to a second guide state forming a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion. The region sandwiched between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion is an operating region of the guide means when switching between the first guide state and the second guide state. It is also possible to say "game machine."

Feature B12. The guide means provides a first guide path that is inclined downward from a position close to the second ball entry portion to a position close to the first ball entry portion in the predetermined region when the first guide state is set. By forming the second guide path, a second guide path is formed in the predetermined region, which is inclined downward from a position close to the first ball entry portion to a position close to the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature B11, which is characterized by having a configuration.

In each guidance state, a guidance path is formed so as to cross a predetermined area. Since the guide route extends from the entry portion that is the guide destination to the periphery of the entry portion that is not the guide destination, most of the game balls that have reached the predetermined area are guided to the entry portion. In this way, if an attempt is made to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is assumed that the operating area of the guiding means is increased. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature B11 is applied to such a configuration and the region (predetermined region) between the ball entry portions is set as the operating region of the guiding means, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature B13. The guide means has a plurality of rotatably provided movable bodies, and the movable bodies are arranged at predetermined passage forming positions, whereby the first guide path and the second guide path are formed. The gaming machine according to feature B12, characterized in that it is played.

When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by using the rotary movable body, the operating area tends to be bulky due to the increase in the size of the movable body, and the operating area is limited to a predetermined area. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Therefore, if the guiding means is composed of a plurality of movable bodies and each guiding path is formed by the combination of the movable bodies, the unnecessary expansion of the operating area is suppressed and the operating area of the guiding means to the outside of the predetermined area is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the spread of. Therefore, the space saving of the ball entry device can be suitably promoted.

Feature B14. The guide means has a first rotation center portion and a second rotation center portion, and forms the first guide path by rotating around the first rotation center portion, and the second rotation. The gaming machine according to feature B12 or feature B13, characterized in that the second guide path is formed by rotating around a moving center portion.

When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by using the rotary movable body, the operating area tends to be bulky due to the increase in the size of the movable body, and the operating area is limited to a predetermined area. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Therefore, if the rotation center portion when forming the first guide path and the rotation center portion when forming the second guide path are different from each other, it is possible to suppress unnecessary expansion of the operating area of the guide means. It is possible to suppress the expansion of the operating area of the guiding means outside the predetermined area. Therefore, the space saving of the ball entry device can be suitably promoted.

Feature B15. The guiding means has a first movable body (first movable body 350) and a second movable body (second movable body 360) provided so as to be slidable in the thickness direction of the game board, and the first movable body is provided. The movable body is placed in the protruding position protruding into the predetermined area to be in the first guide state, and the second movable body is placed in the protruding position protruding into the predetermined area to be in the second guide state. The gaming machine according to feature B12, which is characterized in that it is configured to be.

According to the feature B15, the first movable body and the second movable body can slide and move in the thickness direction of the game board, and the guide path is formed by the movable bodies protruding into a predetermined area. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the operating area of the movable body to the portion outside the predetermined area in the game area. Therefore, the space saving of the ball entry device can be suitably promoted.

In addition, each technical idea shown in the said feature A group may be applied to feature B1 to feature B15.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to realize the diversification of gaming."

Features C1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) provided in the game area where the game ball enters.
A first guide state that is displaceably provided in the game area and guides the game ball to the first entry portion, a second guide state that guides the game ball to the second entry portion, and the first guide state. Guide section (for example, guide section 400L, 410L, guide section 400M, 410M, movable body 430N, 440N, movable) that can be switched to a non-guidance state in which the game ball is not guided to either the ball entry section or the second ball entry section. With a body of 470V, etc.)
The first displacement region in which the guide portion is displaced in the gaming area when the guide portion is switched from the non-guided state to the first guide state, and the guide portion is changed from the non-guided state to the second guide state. A gaming machine characterized in that a second displacement region in which the guide portion is displaced when switching is partially overlapped in the gaming region.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry units (ball entry devices) in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game parts in the game area.

Here, in the configuration in which the guide portion is displaced to be in the first guide state / the second guide state, the displacement region of the guide portion in each guide state is a dead state in which other game parts cannot be arranged or it is difficult. It becomes a space. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first displacement region in the first guide state and the second displacement region in the second guide state partially overlap each other, a variable ball entry can be performed. Even when a plurality of devices are used in combination, it is possible to preferably prevent the dead space from being unnecessarily increased.

Feature C2. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged so that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other.
The guide portion is arranged in a predetermined region (specific region SE) between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion, and is the predetermined in the first guide state and the second guide state. The game ball is guided to the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section through the area.
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the overlapping portion of the first displacement region and the second displacement region is located in the predetermined region.

In a configuration in which the game balls entering the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section both pass through a predetermined area, the predetermined area becomes a dead space in which it is difficult to arrange other game parts. Therefore, by using this region as the displacement region of the guide portion, it is possible to promote the miniaturization of the ball entry device. In particular, if the overlapping portion of each displacement region is arranged in a predetermined region, the first displacement region when the predetermined region is in the first guide state, the second displacement region when the predetermined region is in the second guide state, and both entry portions. It functions as an introduction area, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the expansion of the occupied area due to the combined use of a plurality of ball entry portions.

Feature C3. The guide unit forms a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry unit by being in the first guide state, and the game ball flowing down the game area. It receives and changes its flow direction so that it faces the first ball entry portion.
The game according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the overlapping portion of the first displacement region and the second displacement region is located in the region where the first guide path is formed in the gaming region. Machine.

It is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide path of the game ball. Therefore, the displacement region is suitably secured by the configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, the configuration in which both the first displacement region and the second displacement region utilize the formation region of the first guide path. Can be done. By constructing such a coexistence relationship, even when the total length of the first guide path is lengthened and the receiving width of the game ball is increased, it is suitably suppressed that the ball entry device becomes bloated due to it. can.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "the guide unit is in the first guide state, so that the first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry unit is set to the predetermined area. The game according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, wherein at least a part of the region in which the first guide path is formed overlaps with the second region. It is also possible to say "machine."

Feature C4. The guide unit forms a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry unit by being in the first guide state, and is in the second guide state. It forms a second guide path (second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second entry portion, and is configured to receive the game ball flowing down the game area and change its flow direction. And
At least a part of the region in which the first guide path is formed in the game area is the second displacement region in which the guide means is displaced when the second guide path is formed.
The gaming region is characterized in that at least a part of the region where the second guide path is formed is the first displacement region in which the guide means is displaced when the first guide path is formed. Feature The gaming machine described in C1.

It is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide path of the game ball. Therefore, by configuring the overlapping portion to be located in this region, that is, both the first displacement region and the second displacement region utilize the formation region of the first guide path and the formation region of the second guide path. A displacement region can be suitably secured. If such a coexistence relationship is established, even if the total length of the first guide path and the second guide path is lengthened to increase the receiving width of the game ball, the ball entry device becomes bloated due to this. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C5. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) provided in the game area where the game ball enters.
A first guide unit (for example, a first guide unit 400L) that can be displaced to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first ball entry unit and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guidance in the game area.
In the game area, a second guide position for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion and a second guide portion (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that can be displaced to a second non-guide position that does not guide the game ball are provided. ,
The first guide portion and the second guide portion include a first operating region through which the first guide portion passes when the first guide portion is displaced from the first non-guide position to the first guide position. When the 2 guide portions are displaced from the second non-guide position to the second guide position, the second guide portion is configured to partially overlap with the second operating region through which the second guide portion passes. A game machine to play.

It is preferable to use a plurality of variable ball entry devices in combination in order to realize diversification of the game and to improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the occupied area of the ball entry device will be large and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger. This is not preferable in terms of coexistence with other game parts in the game area.

Here, in the configuration in which the guide portion is displaced between the guided position and the non-guided position, the operating area of the guide portion becomes a dead space in which other gaming parts cannot be arranged or is difficult. It is not desirable to increase such dead space in the game area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, it is variable if the guide portions are arranged so that the first operating region of the first guide portion and the second operating region of the second guide portion partially overlap each other. Even when a plurality of types of ball entry devices are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the wasteful increase of dead space.

Feature C6. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged so that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other.
The feature C5 is characterized in that the first guide portion and the second guide portion are arranged in a predetermined region (specific region SE) between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. The described gaming machine.

In the configuration in which both ball entry portions are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other, by arranging each guide portion between the ball entry portions, the first operation region and the second operation region can be obtained. The amount of overlap can be increased. Thereby, the effect shown in the feature C5 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the overlapping portion of the first motion region and the second motion region is located between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section.

As shown in the feature C6, in the configuration in which the entrance portions of both entry portions face each other, the game ball enters each entry portion through between the entry portions. As described above, it is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area where the game ball passes. Therefore, there is a configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, a configuration in which the first motion region and the second motion region overlap between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. By making the configuration that also serves as the operation area of the guide portion and the introduction area of the game ball, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball entry device.

Feature C8. The first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position to form a first guide passage (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion, and flows down the game area. It is configured to receive the game ball and change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the side of the first ball entry portion.
The second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position to form a second guide passage (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion, and flows down the game area. In response to the game ball to be played, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so as to be on the side of the second ball entry portion.
The first operating region is configured to partially overlap with the region where the second guide passage is formed in the predetermined region.
The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the second operating region partially overlaps with a region in which the first guide passage is formed in the predetermined region.

It is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area where the guide passage is formed. Therefore, if this area is used as the operation area of the other guide portion, even if the total length of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is lengthened to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is possible. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the enlargement of the ball entry device.

Feature C9. When switching to one of the first guide state in which the first guide unit is arranged at the first guide position and the second guide state in which the second guide unit is arranged at the second guide position is performed, the other The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C5 to the feature C8, which is configured so as not to be switched to the feature C5.

By avoiding the simultaneous occurrence of each guidance state as shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably realize the overlap of each displacement region.

Feature C10. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) provided in the game area where the game ball enters.
A first guide unit (for example, a first guide unit 400L) that can be displaced to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first ball entry unit and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guidance in the game area.
In the game area, a second guide position for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion and a second guide portion (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that can be displaced to a second non-guide position that does not guide the game ball are provided. ,
The first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position to form a first guide passage (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion, and flows down the game area. It is configured to receive the game ball and change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the side of the first ball entry portion.
The second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position to form a second guide passage (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion, and flows down the game area. In response to the game ball to be played, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so as to be on the side of the second ball entry portion.
When the first guide portion is displaced from the first non-guide position to the first guide position, the first operating region through which the first guide portion passes is a part of the region where the second guide passage is formed. Is configured to overlap,
The second operating region through which the second guide portion passes when the second guide portion is displaced from the second non-guide position to the second guide position includes a region in which the first guide passage is formed and a part thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C5 to the feature C7, which is characterized by having an overlapping configuration.

It is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts in the area where the guide passage is formed. Therefore, if this area is used as the operation area of the other guide portion, even if the total length of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is lengthened to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is possible. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the enlargement of the ball entry device.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to B may be applied to the features C1 to C10.

<Characteristic D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and problems that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Feature D1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A ball entry portion (for example, a ball entry portion 331) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters,
It is provided with a guiding means (for example, a guiding portion 400L, 410L, a movable body 430N, 440N) that can switch between a guiding state for guiding the game ball flowing down the gaming area to the entry portion and a non-guidance state for not guiding the gaming ball.
The guide means has a first movable portion (for example, an upper left movable plate 401L, an upper right movable plate 411L, a first movable body 430N) and a second movable portion (for example, a lower right movable plate) that can be moved to a standby position and a passage forming position, respectively. 402L, lower left movable plate 412L, second movable body 440N)
In the guidance state, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are respectively arranged at the passage forming positions, so that a series of guide passages (guidance paths GP1 and GP2) for guiding the game ball to the ball entry portion. Is formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry device that changes the probability of ball entry into the ball entry section by means of guidance, the game can be made monotonous by strengthening the sharpness of the guided / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball entry device, it is preferable that the target range in the guided state is wide. However, if the size of the guiding means is simply increased, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when switching states are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable portion and the second movable portion are used in combination and these movable portions are arranged at the passage forming positions, a series of guide passages are formed. It is possible to avoid increasing the size of moving parts. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the improvement.

Feature D2. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
An entry portion (for example, entry portions 331, 341) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters,
A guiding means (for example, a guiding unit 400L) that can switch between a guiding state in which a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (for example, a specific area SE, a passing portion 420L) in the gaming area is guided to the entry portion and a non-guidance state in which the gaming ball is not guided. , 410L, movable body 430N, 440N)
The guide means is a first movable portion (for example, an upper left movable plate 401L, an upper right movable plate 411L, a first movable body 430N) which is arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined flow path and can be moved to a standby position and a passage forming position, respectively. And has a second movable portion (for example, lower right movable plate 402L, lower left movable plate 412L, second movable body 440N).
When the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the passage forming position, the first movable portion and the second movable portion receive a game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path and head toward the entry portion in the flow direction of the game ball. It changes like
In the guidance state, by arranging the first movable portion and the second movable portion at the passage forming position, a series of guiding the game ball to the entry portion so as to cross the predetermined flow path. A gaming machine characterized in that a guide passage (guide paths GP1 and GP2) is formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry device that changes the probability of ball entry into the ball entry section by means of guidance, the game can be made monotonous by strengthening the sharpness of the guided / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball entry device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) is wide in the guided state. However, if an attempt is made to simply increase the size of the guiding means to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when switching states are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a series of guide passages is formed by using the first movable portion and the second movable portion in combination and arranging these movable portions at the passage forming positions, the target range is While widening (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to avoid increasing the size of each movable part. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the improvement.

Feature D3. Feature D1 or feature D1 characterized in that the movement of the first movable portion from the standby position to the passage forming position and the movement of the second movable portion from the standby position to the passage forming position are synchronized. Feature The gaming machine described in D2.

If the movements of the movable parts are synchronized as shown in this feature, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the responsiveness when a series of guide passages are formed by the plurality of movable parts.

Feature D4. The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
In the case of forming the guide passage, the feature D1 or the feature D2 is characterized in that the first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position after the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position. The described gaming machine.

Whether or not the game ball enters the entry portion depends on the first movable portion forming the downstream portion. That is, even if the game ball moves along the second movable portion arranged at the passage forming position, if the first movable portion is not arranged at the passage forming position, the guidance to the ball entry portion is performed well. No. In such a configuration, the movement of the first movable portion to the passage forming position is delayed more than the arrangement of the second movable portion to the passage forming position, so that the degree of attention to the movement of the first movable portion is preferable. Can be improved.

When the second movable portion forms an upstream portion of the guide passage, there is a certain time lag before the game ball that has reached the second movable portion reaches the first movable portion. Therefore, by delaying the movement of the first movable portion to the passage forming position, it is possible to generate a branch as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the second movable portion moves to the first movable portion.

Feature D5. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to the entrance portion (for example, the entrance portion 332, 342) of the ball entry portion.
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The game according to any one of the features D1 to D4, wherein the downstream end portion of the second movable portion is displaced upward from the extension of the first movable portion to the upstream side. Machine.

As shown in the feature D1 and the like, when a series of passages is formed by combining a plurality of movable parts, a step is generated in the passage due to a deviation of the relative positions of the movable parts and the like. It is assumed that the game ball is caught in this step, which is a factor that hinders the smooth flow of the game ball. As shown in this feature, if the downstream end of the second movable portion forming the upstream portion is displaced upward from the extension of the first movable portion, the game is played from the second movable portion to the first movable portion. It is possible to suitably suppress the catching when the ball moves.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein a gap is formed between the upstream end of the first movable portion and the downstream end of the second movable portion.

In order to expand the guide passage (the receiving width of the game ball), the first movable portion and the second movable portion may be enlarged. However, if such measures are taken, various inconveniences such as slow movement of the movable part occur. Therefore, as shown in the feature D5, if a step is provided at the boundary between the two movable bodies and a gap is formed at the boundary, the guide passage (the receiving width of the game ball) is expanded and each movable body is formed. It is possible to suitably avoid the increase in size.

In order to ensure the function as a guide passage, it is preferable that the gap is smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball cannot pass through.

Feature D7. In the guide passage, the passage length of the portion formed by the first movable portion and the passage length of the portion formed by the second movable portion are configured to be equally divided. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D6.

When a series of guide passages are formed by a plurality of movable parts, the responsiveness depends on the slower moving part. Here, according to the configuration in which the passage lengths are made uniform for each movable portion as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience due to the difference in size can be suitably suppressed.

Feature D8. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to the entrance portion (for example, the entrance portion 332,342) of the ball entry portion.
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable portion is configured to be arranged at the passage forming position and the standby position by rotating with the downstream end of the downstream portion as a base end, and the second movable portion is configured to be arranged at the passage forming position and the standby position. Described in any one of the features D1 to D7, which is characterized in that it is configured to be arranged at the passage forming position and the standby position by rotating with the end portion on the upstream side of the portion as a base end. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if each movable portion rotates toward each other to form a guide passage, the impact when the guide passage is formed can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to preferably exert not only the effect of entering the ball into the ball entry portion but also the effect of visual change (movement of the movable portion) immediately before the entry of the ball.

In particular, when the movable portion is arranged in the game area, the presence of the movable portion can be a factor that limits the flow path. Here, if the movable bodies are configured to rotate toward each other to form a guide path, the region between the movable portions is used as a flow path of the game ball under the condition that the guide path is not formed. It can be suitably used.

Feature D9. The guiding means is configured to guide a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path in the game area (for example, a passing portion 420L in a specific region SE) to the entry portion.
The first movable portion and the second movable portion constitute a passage wall surface of the predetermined flow path in a state where the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D8.

When the movable parts are arranged in the standby position, the movable parts form a passage wall surface of a predetermined flow path. If the passage wall surface is configured by the movable portion in this way, coexistence with other game parts can be suitably realized even when a plurality of movable portions are provided side by side in the game area.

Feature D10. The first movable portion and the second movable portion constitute a passage wall surface of a ball passage through which a game ball passes so as to face each other in a state where the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D8, which is characterized by being

When the movable parts are arranged in the standby position, the movable parts face each other to form the passage wall surface of the ball passage. If the passage wall surface is configured by the movable portion in this way, coexistence with other game parts can be suitably realized even when a plurality of movable portions are provided side by side in the game area.

Feature D11. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to the entrance portion (for example, the entrance portion 332, 342) of the ball entry portion.
The first movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is arranged at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable portion according to any one of the features D1 to D10, characterized in that the first movable portion functions as a restricting portion for restricting entry into the ball entry portion in a state of being arranged at the standby position. Gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if one of the two movable parts forming the downstream part of the guide passage is used as the regulating part (shutter), the ball entry part is used in a situation where the guide passage is not formed. It is possible to prevent the structure from becoming excessively complicated in order to avoid entering the ball.

Feature D12. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section 331) and a second ball entry section (for example, a ball entry section 341) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters.
With a guiding means (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N) that can switch between a guided state for guiding a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (for example, a specific area SE) in the game area and a non-guided state for guiding the game ball to the entry portion. Equipped with
The guidance means is
A first restricted position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 332) of the first entry portion and restricts entry into the first entry portion, and a first inclination that is a downward inclination toward the first entry portion side. A first movable portion (for example, a first movable body 430N) that can move to a position and a second inclined position that is inclined downward toward the second entry portion.
A second restricted position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 342) of the second entry portion and restricts entry into the second entry portion, and a third inclination that is a downward inclination toward the first entry portion side. It has a second movable portion (for example, a second movable body 440N) that can move to a position and a fourth inclined position that is inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion.
The first movable portion is arranged at the first inclined position and the second movable portion is arranged at the third inclined position, so that the first movable portion crosses the predetermined flow path to the first ball entry portion. A series of first guide passages (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball are formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.
The second movable portion is arranged at the second inclined position and the second movable portion is arranged at the fourth inclined position, so that the second movable portion crosses the predetermined flow path to the second ball entry portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a series of second guide passages (second guide path GP2) for guiding a game ball are formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry device that changes the probability of ball entry into the ball entry section by means of guidance, the game can be made monotonous by strengthening the sharpness of the guided / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball entry device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) is wide in the guided state. However, if an attempt is made to simply increase the size of the guiding means to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (stability of operation) when switching states are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a series of guide passages is formed by using the first movable portion and the second movable portion in combination and arranging these movable portions at the passage forming positions, the target range is While widening (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to avoid increasing the size of each movable part. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the player and suppress the occurrence of inconvenience caused by the improvement.

In particular, the first movable portion that functions as a shutter for the first ball entry portion and the second movable portion that functions as a shutter for the second ball entry portion are used in combination to form the first guide passage and the second guide passage. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the guide passage (ball receiving portion) and preferably suppress the complication of the configuration due to it.

Feature D13. In the state where the first guide passage is formed, the entry into the second ball entry portion is restricted by the first movable portion and the second movable portion.
The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein in a state where the second guide passage is formed, entry into the first ball entry portion is restricted by the first movable portion and the second movable portion. ..

As shown in the feature D12, the configuration in which each movable portion doubles as a shutter and a passage forming portion increases the size of the guide passage (ball receiving portion) and suppresses the complication of the configuration due to it. It is advantageous on the above. However, for example, when the first guide passage is formed and the second movable portion is arranged at the third inclined position, the second entry portion is opened and the entry restriction to the second entry portion is restricted. It becomes loose. Further, when the first movable portion is arranged at the second inclined position in the case of forming the second guide passage, the first ball entry portion is opened and the ball entry restriction to the first ball entry portion is loosened. Become. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first guide passage is formed, the first movable portion and the second movable portion regulate the entry of the ball into the second entry portion, and when the second guide passage is formed, the first movable portion is restricted. The occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by configuring the second movable portion to restrict entry into the first ball entry portion and configuring the movable portions to compensate for the deterioration of the regulation function.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to C may be applied to the features D1 to D12.

<Characteristic E group>
The following feature E group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to realize the diversification of gaming."

Features E1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (for example, the first entry section 331) and a second entry section (for example, the second entry section 341) provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters.
A first guide unit (for example, first movable bodies 350F, 350G) that can move to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first ball entry unit and a first non-guidance position that does not guide the game ball.
A second guide portion (for example, second movable bodies 360F, 360G) that can move to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second entry portion and a second non-guide position that does not guide the game ball.
When the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position, the first guide passage (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed together with the first guide portion. Then, when the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position, the second guide passage (for example, the second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second entry portion together with the second guide portion. A gaming machine characterized by having a passage forming portion (for example, cores 390F, 390G) forming the above.

In a type of gaming machine equipped with a variable ball entry device that changes the probability of ball entry into the ball entry portion, it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game by enhancing the sharpness during guidance / non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the ball entry device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) at the time of guidance is wide. However, if the guide portion is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, the occupied area of the ball entry device becomes large. That is, when the guide passage is lengthened to increase the number of game balls to be guided, the occupied area of the guide portion becomes large. In this respect, as shown in this feature, if the passage forming portion forming a part of one guide passage is used to form a part of the other guide passage, the above-mentioned inconvenience is suitably suppressed. can. This can contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entry device.

Feature E2. The passage forming portion projects from the front surface of the game board to the front of the game area in a state where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed at least.
The first guide portion is configured to be arranged at the first guide position and the first non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board.
The game according to feature E1, wherein the second guide portion is configured to be arranged at the second guide position and the second non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board. Machine.

When each guide passage is formed by each guide portion and the passage forming portion, a step is generated in the guide passage due to the positional deviation between the guide portion and the passage forming portion. Such a step can be a factor that hinders a smooth flow such as the game ball being caught. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the moving direction of each guide portion is matched with the protruding direction of the passage forming portion, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the misalignment of the guide portion can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball is sandwiched between the guide portion and the passage forming portion, deformation such as distortion may occur in the passage forming portion. In this regard, by devising the operation direction of each guide portion as shown in this feature, the game ball is sandwiched between the guide portion and the passage forming portion when the guide portion moves from the non-guidance position to the guide position. Can be avoided. By protecting the passage forming portion in this way, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of the game ball in the guide passage.

Feature E3. The first guide portion is formed with a first insertion portion (for example, notches 353F, 353G) through which the passage forming portion is inserted, and the passage forming portion is inserted through the second guide portion. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein a second insertion portion (for example, a recessed portion 363F, 363G) is formed.

As shown in this feature, each guide portion is provided with an insertion portion for a passage forming portion, and the passage forming portion is inserted through these insertion portions, thereby contributing to space saving of the entire guide passage.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion intersect at an arrangement portion of the passage forming portion.

As shown in this feature, if both guide portions intersect at the location where the flow path forming portion is arranged, the total length of each guide passage (the receiving width of the game ball) is achieved while saving space for the entire guide passage. Can be increased.

Feature E5. The first guide portion and the second guide portion have a flat plate shape.
In the state where the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first guide portion is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion.
In the state where the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second guide portion is inclined downward to the second ball entry portion.
The passage forming portion is
A first inclined portion (for example, the first inclined portion 391F) constituting the rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide passage together with the upper plate surface in the first guide portion.
A feature characterized by having a second inclined portion (for example, a second inclined portion 392F) constituting a rolling surface of a game ball in the second guide passage together with an upper plate surface in the second guide portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E4.

According to the feature E5, by providing the first inclined portion in accordance with the first guide portion and providing the second inclined portion in accordance with the second guide portion, restrictions on the direction of the guide passage and the like can be suitably relaxed.

Feature E6. The first guide portion has a first accommodating portion (for example, a notch 353F) for accommodating the second inclined portion in a state where the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position.
The second guide portion has a second accommodating portion (for example, a recessed portion 363F) that accommodates the first inclined portion in a state where the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to the feature E5.

According to the feature E6, an unnecessary portion (inclined portion) in the passage forming portion is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the guide portion. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the behavior of the game ball from being disturbed due to the game ball being caught in an unnecessary portion.

In combination with the feature E3, the "insertion portion" shown in the feature E3 may be the same as the "accommodation portion" shown in the present feature.

Feature E7. The passage forming portion is movable to a protruding position protruding into the game area and a retracting position in which the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide passage nor the second guide passage is formed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, which is configured to stand by at the retracted position.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide passage is not formed, the passage forming portion is suppressed from protruding into the game area. This makes it possible to reduce the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the passage forming portion. By protecting the passage forming portion in this way, when the guide passage is formed by the passage forming portion and the guide portion, the relative positions of the two may vary and the game ball may not be guided smoothly. Can be suppressed.

Feature E8. When the first guide portion moves to the first guide position, the passage forming portion moves to the protruding position following the first guide portion, and the second guide portion moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E7, which is configured to follow the second guide portion and move to the protruding position when moving to.

When the passage forming portion is of the infested type as shown in the feature E7, the passage forming portion is configured to move to the protruding position following the movement of each guide portion to the guide position. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the formation timing.

Feature E9. The moving direction of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is the same as the moving direction of the passage forming portion.
The first guide portion is provided with a first action portion (for example, an arm portion 355G) that moves the passage forming portion to the protruding position when the first guide portion moves to the first guide position. ,
The second guide portion is provided with a second action portion (for example, an arm portion 365G) that moves the passage forming portion to the protruding position when the second guide portion moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E7 or feature E8.

If the passage forming portion is a haunting type as shown in the feature E7 or the like, various effects such as protection of the passage forming portion can be expected. However, the fact that a drive unit for driving the passage forming unit is required separately hinders the simplification and miniaturization of the configuration of the ball entry device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the movement directions of each guide portion and the passage forming portion are unified, and the passage forming portion is newly pushed to the protruding position by the acting portion provided in each guide portion. There is no need to add a drive unit. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive complication of the configuration of the ball entry device and contribute to the miniaturization of the ball entry device.

Feature E10. When the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position and the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position from one to the other, the first guide portion is arranged at the protruding position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E7 to E9, wherein the passage forming portion is delivered from one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion to the other at the protruding position. ..

Considering that the passage forming portion moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, the game ball may be caught when it is arranged at the protruding position. Therefore, when switching from the state in which the guide passage is formed together with one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion to the state in which the guide passage is formed together with the other, the return to the retracted position of the passage forming portion is avoided. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience by adopting a configuration in which (for example, it is kept in a protruding position).

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a case where the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position and the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position from one of the states to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E7 to E9, wherein the passage forming portion arranged at the protruding position is prevented from moving to the retracted position. " Is also possible.

Feature E11. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged side by side and the entrance portions (entrance portions 332, 342) are arranged so as to face each other.
The features E7 to be characterized in that the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E10.

As shown in this feature, if the ball entry portions are arranged so as to face each other and the guide passage is formed in the region sandwiched by the ball entry portions, the miniaturization of the ball entry device can be promoted. When the passage forming portion is shared by both guide passages in such a configuration, the following inconvenience occurs if the passage forming portion remains in the above region when the guide passage is not formed. That is, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the region may bounce off the passage forming portion and head toward the entry portion. In this respect, if the passage forming portion is a haunting type as shown in the feature E7 or the like, such movement of the game ball can be suitably avoided, and the game ball is not guided to the entry part. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a ball entering the ball entry portion.

Feature E12. The passage forming portion is characterized in that an engaging portion that engages with at least one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion is formed on the front surface side of the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of E11.

In a configuration in which the game component protrudes toward the front surface of the game board, it is difficult to improve the strength of the game component because the game component is cantilevered. Therefore, if the passage forming portion and the guide portion are engaged with each other to mutually supplement the strength, such a lack of strength can be suitably solved.

For example, if the passage forming portion is smaller than the guide portion, the passage forming portion is supported (reinforced) by the guide portion, and if the passage forming portion is a fixed type and there is a margin in terms of strength, the corresponding portion is concerned. It is preferable to support (reinforce) the guide portion by the passage forming portion.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to D may be applied to the features E1 to E12.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of gaming by the variable ball-entry means." It is a thing.

Features F1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) capable of entering a gaming ball in the gaming area. There,
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and the second entry section (second entry section 341) into which the game ball enters,
A first movable body (for example, a first movable body) that can move to a first guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion and a first non-guided position (evacuation position) in which the game ball is not guided. 350, 350H, 1st guide unit 400L),
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body) that can move to a second guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion and a second non-guided position (evacuation position) in which the game ball is not guided. 360, 360H, 2nd guide unit 410L)
The first state in which the first movable body is arranged in the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged in the second non-guided position, and the first movable body is arranged in the first non-guided position. The second state in which the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position and the first movable body are arranged at the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position. It is equipped with a switching means (MPU of the main control device 162) for switching to the third state.
In the third state, the gaming machine is characterized in that a stage portion (stage ST) on which a gaming ball can be stopped is formed by the first movable body and the second movable body.

For example, in a configuration in which guidance / non-guidance by a movable body is repeatedly switched, the player can suppress unnecessary investment by devising a launch operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during non-guidance. If such technical intervention is permitted, there will be a difference in the benefits and the like obtained according to the skill of the player. This can be an obstacle in improving the fairness of the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when both movable bodies are in the third state in which they are arranged at the guide positions, a stage portion on which the game ball can be stopped is formed by the movable bodies. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the movable body in the third state is not immediately discharged, but a certain amount of grace is provided before discharge. As a result, when the game ball whose discharge is delayed is switched to the first state or the second state again, it is possible to give an opportunity to enter the first ball entry section or the second entry section. In this way, if the configuration is such that the opportunity to enter the ball entry section is given, wasteful investment can be suppressed without refraining from launching the game ball in anticipation of non-guidance. As a result, the above-mentioned problem related to fairness can be suitably solved. The configuration is complicated by forming the stage portion by using the first movable body that functions as the guide portion for the first ball entry portion and the second movable body that functions as the guide portion for the second ball entry portion in combination. It is possible to exert the above effect while suppressing the formation.

It should be noted that the "stage portion" shown in this feature can be referred to as a "stop portion" by paying attention to the fact that the game ball can be stopped.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) in which a game ball can enter the game area. ) Is provided, and the ball entry means is a first entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) into which the game ball enters. ), And a first movable body (for example, a first movable body) that can move to a first guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion and a first non-guide position (retracted position) in which the guidance is not performed. 1 movable body 350, 350H, 1st guide portion 400L), a 2nd guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding the game ball to the 2nd entry portion, and a second non-guidance position (retracted position) in which the guidance is not performed. ) With a second movable body (for example, second movable body 360, 360H, second guide portion 410L), the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position, and the second movable body is arranged. Is arranged in the second non-guided position, and the first movable body is arranged in the first non-guided position and the second movable body is arranged in the second guided position. And a switching means (MPU of the main control device 162) for switching between the first movable body and the third state in which the first movable body is arranged in the first guide position and the second movable body is arranged in the second guide position. In the third state, the game machine characterized in that a stage portion (stage ST) on which the game ball can roll is formed by the first movable body and the second movable body. "

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the stage portion is formed so as to straddle the first movable body and the second movable body.

If the stage portion is formed so as to straddle both movable bodies as shown in the feature F2, the number of game balls that can be stopped at the stage portion can be increased while suppressing the increase in the size of the ball entry means. ..

Feature F3. The switching means has a means for switching from the third state to any of the first state and the second state.
The first movable body can guide the game ball flowing out of the stage portion to the first ball entry portion by switching to the first state, and the second movable body moves to the second state. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2, characterized in that the gaming ball flowing out of the stage portion can be guided to the second ball entry portion by switching.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball stopped at the stage portion in the third state is guided to the first entry portion or the second entry portion by switching to the first state or the second state. .. As a result, the stopped game ball can be suitably given an opportunity to enter the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, and the effect shown in the feature F1 can be suitably exerted.

Features F4. The switching means is a means for switching from the first state to the third state by moving the second movable body to the second guide position, and the first movable body from the second state. It has a means for switching to the third state by moving to the first guide position.
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the stage portion is configured to be maintained until it is switched to either the first state or the second state.

According to the combination of the feature F3 and the feature F4, the first state / the second state → the third state → the first state / the second state can be obtained. At this time, the stage portion formed by switching to the third state is maintained until the next switching to the first state / second state. For this reason, for example, when the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entry section or the second entry section is completed, the stage section is formed, and the entry into the first ball entry section or the second entry section is normally performed. It is possible to temporarily hold the game ball, which should not have been given a ball opportunity, at the stop, and then wait for the switch to the first state / second state. According to this configuration, the stage portion can be positively used to give an opportunity to enter the ball, and the effect shown in the feature F1 can be more preferably exhibited.

In addition, instead of moving the two movable bodies to the guide position at the same time, the stage portion is configured to arrange the other movable body at the guide position while one movable body is arranged at the guide position. It is advantageous in suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging during formation.

Features F5. When the first movable body switches from the third state to the first state, the first movable body inserts a game ball stopped at a portion configured by the second movable body in the stage portion. It is possible to guide to the ball club,
The second movable body is a second-entry ball that is stopped at a portion configured by the first movable body at the stage portion when the third state is switched to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, which is characterized in that it can be guided to a unit.

When the stage portion is formed by combining the first movable body and the second movable body, the game ball stopped on the first movable body at the stage portion is given an opportunity to enter the second entry portion. By giving the game ball stopped on the second movable body at the stage portion an opportunity to enter the first ball entry portion, the spill of the game ball is more preferably suppressed. In this way, by imparting fluidity to the guide destination of the stopped game ball, smoothing of the game progress can be suitably promoted.

Feature F6. The stage portion is a guide path for the game ball to the first ball entry section by the first movable body (first guide path GP1) and a guide path for the game ball to the second ball entry section by the second movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F3 to the feature F5, which is formed over (the second guide path GP2).

If the stage portion is formed over the two guide paths, the presence of the stage portion can prevent the player from paying attention to a wide area. This is a preferable configuration for improving the degree of attention to the game ball while it is stationary.

Feature F7. The stage portion is capable of moving the game ball from the first movable body side to the second movable body side and moving the game ball from the second movable body side to the first movable body side. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F3 to the feature F6.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball that has reached the stage portion from becoming monotonous.

Feature F8. The gaming ball staying on the second movable body when switching from the third state to the first state moves onto the first movable body, and when switching from the third state to the second state, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features F3 to F7, wherein the gaming ball parked on the first movable body is configured to move onto the second movable body.

According to the feature F8, when the stop by the stage part is released, the game ball mounted on the movable body that is not guided this time can move to the movable body that is guided this time, so that the game ball to be guided is You can earn more and increase the chances that multiple game balls will be guided to the entry section at once.

Features F9. The switching means according to any one of the features F3 to F8, characterized in that the switching means has means for alternately switching between the first state and the second state with the third state sandwiched between them. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that did not enter one of the entry portions is guided to the other entry portion via the stop. As a result, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F10. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side so as to be side by side.
The stage portion is formed at a position between the first entry portion and the second entry portion in the parallel direction of the first entry portion and the second entry portion, and the first entry portion is formed. It has a first inclined portion that descends from the ball portion side to the second entry portion side and a second inclined portion that descends from the second entry portion side to the second entry portion side. The boundary portion of the second inclined portion is configured to be the bottom portion of the stage portion.
The game according to any one of the features F1 to F9, wherein the first inclined portion is formed by the first movable body, and the second inclined portion is formed by the second movable body. Machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has reached the stage portion moves to the bottom portion and stops in a state of being in contact with the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the movement of the game ball when the stop is released.

Features F11. A game ball disposed in front of or behind the stage portion and stopped at the stage portion flows out of the stage portion without entering either the first entry portion or the second entry portion. Equipped with an outflow passage (communication passage 317)
A guide portion for guiding a game ball is formed on the upper surface (upper surface 351) of the first movable body and the upper surface (upper surface 361) of the second movable body on the entrance portion side of the outflow passage. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F10.

An excessive number of game balls stopped at the stage portion may be a factor that hinders the smooth flow of the game balls around the ball entry means. In addition, if an excessively large number of game balls are stopped, the game balls are guided to each ball entry portion at once, resulting in excessive ball entry (so-called over-winning). Therefore, if the game ball is appropriately discharged from the stop portion by the outflow passage shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F12. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
An entry portion (for example, entry portion 331) provided in the game area where a game ball can enter, and a ball entry portion 331.
A first position having a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll (for example, the upper surface 351) and forming a guide passage (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the ball entry portion by the rolling surface. And a movable body (for example, a movable body 350) that can move to a second position forming a detour passage (for example, the detour passage TE1) that bypasses the ball entry portion by the rolling surface.
The period required for the game ball to pass through the guide passage when the movable body is arranged at the first position is such that the game ball detours when the movable body is arranged at the second position. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be longer than the time required to pass through a passage.

According to the feature F12, when the guide passage is formed, the movement is swiftly moved to the ball entry portion, and when the detour passage is formed, the movement is slow. Therefore, by moving the movable body from the second position to the first position, it is possible to increase the chance that the game ball that was moving in the detour passage heads for the ball.

Feature F13. When the movable body is arranged at the second position, the movable body is in contact with the game ball moving along the rolling surface to delay the movement of the game ball, while the movable body is at the first position. The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a contact portion that avoids contact with a gaming ball that moves along the rolling surface when arranged in.

According to the feature F13, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the detour passage is lower than the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide passage. As a result, the game ball can be quickly moved to the entry portion at the time of guidance, while the movement of the game ball can be delayed at the time of detour. As a result, the effect shown in the feature F12 can be suitably exerted.

Feature F14. A posture changing means for changing the inclination angle of the rolling surface with respect to the horizontal plane by changing the posture of the movable body is provided.
When the movable body is arranged in the first position, the inclination of the rolling surface with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than that in the case where the movable body is arranged in the second position. The gaming machine according to the feature F12 or the feature F13.

According to the feature F14, the inclination of the rolling surface is increased by moving from the second position to the first position. As a result, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface is increased. This shortens the time required to pass through the guide passage. On the other hand, by moving from the first position to the second position, the inclination of the rolling surface becomes smaller. As a result, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface becomes low, and the period required for passing through the detour passage becomes long. If the posture of the movable body is changed in this way to change the moving speed of the game ball, the effect shown in the feature F12 can be suitably exhibited.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to E may be applied to the features F1 to F14.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to realize the diversification of gaming."

Features G1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) provided in the game area where the game ball enters.
It is movable within a predetermined range including the first position (protruding position), and by being arranged at the first position, the first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion. ) With the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350, 350H, the first guide portion 400L).
It is movable within a predetermined range including the second position (protruding position), and by being arranged at the second position, the second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion. ) Is provided with a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 360, 360H, a second guide portion 410L).
In the state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the first movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second entry portion through the second guide path.
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the second movable body is characterized in that the movement of the game ball to the first ball entry portion through the first guide path is prevented. A game machine to play.

According to the feature G1, when the situation is such that the game ball should be guided to the first ball entry section, the game ball is guided to the first ball entry section by arranging the first movable body at the first position. 1 A guide path is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the second entry portion is blocked by the first movable body forming the first guide path. In addition, when the situation is such that the game ball should be guided to the second entry section, the second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second entry section is provided by arranging the second movable body at the second position. It is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion is blocked by the second movable body forming the second guide path. As a result, it is possible to avoid entering a ball into a ball entry portion that is not set as a guide destination for the game ball, and accidental entry into the ball can be suitably suppressed.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature is "a gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. It can move within a predetermined range including the first ball entry section (first ball entry section 331) and the second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341) and a predetermined position (protruding position), and can be moved to the predetermined position. It is provided with a movable body (for example, the first movable body 350, 350H, the guide portion 400L) that forms a guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion by being arranged. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position, the movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second ball entry portion. "

Feature G2. In the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the entrance portions (for example, inlet portions 332, 342) of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are relative to each other across a predetermined region (specific region SE). Arranged to face,
In the state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the first movable body is between the inflow point (inflow port OE) where the game ball flows into the predetermined area and the second ball entry portion. Position to,
In the state where the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the second movable body is configured to be located between the inflow point and the inlet portion of the first ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to the feature G1.

When the entrance portions of the ball entry portions are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the ball entry portion that is not the guide destination. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the game ball is guided to each entry portion by the movable body, the movable body is so as to block the inflow point to the predetermined area and the entrance portion of the entry portion that is not the guide destination. By arranging the ball, it is possible to suitably avoid entering the ball into a ball entry portion that is not a guide destination.

Feature G3. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the game ball cannot pass between the first movable body and the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion in the predetermined area. It is composed and
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the game ball cannot pass between the second movable body and the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is characterized by being configured.

As shown in this feature, when the movable body is placed in the guide position (first position or second position), the gap created between the movable body and the ball entry portion that is not the guide destination prevents the game ball from passing through. If it is configured as, it is possible to suitably suppress the entry of a ball into a entry portion other than the guide destination in the configuration in which a plurality of entry portions are provided side by side.

Features G4. A means for arranging the second movable body in the second position in a situation where the first movable body is arranged in the first position, and a means for arranging the second movable body in the second position.
Any of the features G1 to G3 characterized in that the second movable body is provided with a means for arranging the first movable body in the first position under the situation where the second movable body is arranged in the second position. The gaming machine described in one.

When the second movable body is placed at the second position in a situation where the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, the second movable body causes the game ball to move along the first guide path. Be hindered. On the other hand, when the first movable body is arranged at the first position in a situation where the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, the first movable body causes the game ball along the second guide path. Movement is hindered. In this way, each movable body has a function of forming a flow path and a function of cutting the flow path, so that the movement when switching the entry destination can be made novel.

Feature G5. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position, a means for disengaging the second movable body from the second position after arranging the second movable body at the second position.
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, the means for disengaging the first movable body from the first position after arranging the first movable body at the first position is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature G4, which is characterized by being present.

When the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, the possibility of entering the first ball entry portion is switched by arranging / not arranging the second movable body at the second position. Can be done. Further, when the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, the first movable body is arranged / not arranged at the first position to determine whether or not the ball can enter the second ball entry portion. You can switch. In this way, if the configuration is such that the flow path once formed is maintained, the movement of the game ball can be made novel. In this case, it is possible to reproduce the same movement by individually providing the shutter, but there is a concern that the ball entry device will become larger by providing the shutter separately. In this respect, since the other movable body functions as a shutter as shown in this feature, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball and suitably suppress the increase in size of the ball entry device due to the improvement.

Feature G6. By arranging the first movable body at the first position and arranging the second movable body at the second position, the game ball moves to the first ball entry portion through the first guide path. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G5, wherein the game ball cannot move to the second ball entry portion through the second guide path.

According to the feature G6, since the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, it is impossible for the game ball to enter both the ball entry portions. For example, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering each ball entry portion by retracting both the first movable body and the second movable body, but the two movable bodies can be used as the shutter of the other ball entry section. If this is the case, the certainty of avoiding entering the ball can be increased. Further, since it is not necessary to newly form a flow path at the time of resuming the guidance of the game ball, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the ball can enter.

Feature G7. In the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section, the entrance portions (for example, inlet portions 332, 342) of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are relative to each other across a predetermined region (specific region SE). Arranged to face,
In the first ball entry portion, the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion is the predetermined area due to the first movable body arranged at the first position and the second movable body arranged at the second position. It is configured to be covered from the side,
In the second ball entry portion, the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion is the predetermined area due to the first movable body arranged at the first position and the second movable body arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to feature G6, which is characterized in that it is covered from the side.

If the entrance portion of each ball entry portion is covered with both movable bodies in this feature, the effect shown in feature G6 can be suitably exhibited. In particular, instead of covering the entrance portion with one movable body, the two movable bodies are used together to cover the entrance portion, so that the movable body arranged at the guide position (first position or second position) is used. Even in the configuration in which the guide path is formed by the above, it is possible to suitably suppress the restriction on the handling of the guide path from becoming stronger due to the shielding function.

Features G8. By arranging the second movable body in the second position under the situation where the first movable body is arranged in the first position, the movement of the game ball along the first guide path is caused by the second movement. Means to regulate by movable body,
In the situation where the second movable body is arranged at the second position, by arranging the first movable body at the first position, the movement of the game ball along the second guide path is caused by the first movement. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G7, which is provided with a means for regulating by a movable body.

As shown in this feature, if a movable body that functions as a guiding means to one entry portion is configured to function as a shutter (stopper) that regulates the movement of the game ball to the other entry portion, a plurality of variable types can be used. In configuring the ball entry means by the ball entry device, it is possible to suitably suppress the complexity of the configuration related to the ball entry means.

Feature G9. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, a gaming ball from the first movable body side to the second movable body side. The gaming machine according to feature G8, wherein the gaming ball can be moved and the gaming ball can be moved from the second movable body side to the first movable body side.

According to the feature G9, for example, if the movement of the game ball is hindered by the second movable body while the guidance is being performed through the first guide path, the game ball stops immediately on the spot. Instead, there is room to move towards another newly formed path. Such behavior of the game ball can suppress the monotonic movement of the game ball. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball.

Feature G10. The guiding direction of the game ball by the first movable body and the operating direction of the second movable body intersect with each other.
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or feature G9, wherein the guiding direction of the gaming ball by the second movable body and the operating direction of the first movable body intersect with each other.

Features As shown in G8 etc., when each movable body has both a guide function and a shutter function (stopper function), the guide function is caused by the movable body being displaced due to the load from the game ball. Is worried that it will not be exhibited well. It is assumed that such an inconvenience becomes remarkable when the operating direction and the guiding direction match. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by crossing the operating direction and the guiding direction, it is preferable that the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs even when each movable body has both the guiding function and the shutter function. Can be suppressed.

Feature G11. Under the situation where the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is the first. A means for retracting from the position or the second position is provided.
The side where the game ball is guided by the first movable body and the side where the game ball is guided by the second movable body are opposite to each other.
The first movable body and the second movable body can come into contact with the game ball to be guided from the side opposite to the side on which the game ball is guided by the first movable body, and the second movable body can be in contact with the game ball. The game according to any one of the feature G8 to the feature G10, which is characterized in that the game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball to be guided from the side opposite to the side to which the game ball is guided by the movable body. Machine.

According to the feature G11, when the two movable bodies are both arranged at the guide positions (first position and the second position) and the flow of the game ball is restricted, the game ball hits the two movable bodies. It will be in contact. Under the situation where the guidance of the game ball by the other movable body is restricted by one movable body, the regulated game ball becomes the other movable body as it is by retracting the one movable body from the guide position. The flow will start along. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably improve the responsiveness and smooth the flow of the game ball when the guidance is started.

Feature G12. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
A first ball entry section (first entry section) provided in the game area and arranged such that an entrance portion (for example, an entrance portion 332, 342) of a game ball faces each other across a predetermined area (specific area SE). 331) and the second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341),
It is movable within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (protruding position), and by being arranged at the predetermined position, a guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed. A movable body (for example, a first movable body 350, 350H, a guide portion 400L) is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position, the movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second ball entry portion.

According to the feature G12, when the situation is such that the game ball should be guided to the first ball entry section, a guide path for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section is formed by arranging the movable body at a predetermined position. Will be done. At this time, the movable body forming the guide path prevents the game ball from moving toward the second ball entry portion. As a result, it is possible to avoid entering the ball into the entry portion that is not set as the guide destination of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress accidental entry into the second entry portion.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to F may be applied to the features G1 to G12.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is "Some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a game board in which a game area is formed. A game ball launched based on a player's launch operation is in the game area. By winning a prize in the provided operating port, etc., the player is given benefits such as a winning / failing lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and paying out the gaming ball. (For example, see Patent Document 1). In the special gaming state, for example, the variable ball-entry means is switched between the accepted state and the non-accepted state a plurality of times. If the ball has reached the variable entry means, the ball is allowed to enter, and if the variable entry means is in the non-accepted state, the ball that has reached the variable entry means is allowed to enter. Regarding the background technology of "being hindered", "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, when the variable ball entry means is in the non-accepting state, the game ball is launched so as not to reach the variable ball entry means." By devising the operation, the player can suppress unnecessary investment. If such technical intervention is allowed, the benefits and the like obtained will differ depending on the skill of the player. This can be an obstacle in improving the fairness of the game. "

Features H1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a variable ball entry means (variable winning unit 83) capable of switching between an acceptance state and a non-acceptance state in which a game ball is accepted in the game area is provided. It ’s a pachinko machine that is installed.
The variable ball entry means
A ball entry section (for example, the first entry section 331) where a game ball can enter, and
A guide that can be moved to a formation position (for example, a protruding position) that forms a guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the ball entry portion and a non-formation position (for example, a retracted position) that does not form the guide path. A path forming portion (for example, first movable body 350, 350H, first guide portion 400L) and
Restricted parts (for example, second movable bodies 360, 360H, first 2 Guide unit 410L)
When the guide path forming portion is arranged at the formation position and the regulation portion is arranged at the allowable position to switch the variable ball entry means to the non-accepting state, the guide path forming portion is moved to the formation position. A gaming machine characterized in that the movement precedes the movement of the regulation unit to the permissible position.

According to the feature H1, since the guide path is formed prior to the opening of the ball entry portion, it is possible to give the player the impression that the spill is avoided for the game ball that has reached the guide path prior to the opening. .. By relieving the spilled ball in this way, it is possible to suppress the interruption of the launching operation of the gaming ball by waiting for the opening of the entry portion and to promote the continuation of the launching of the gaming ball. .. This is preferable in suppressing the delay in the progress of the game. In addition, the fairness of the game can be suitably improved by suppressing the difference in the obtained benefits and the like according to the skill of the player.

Feature H2. The restricting portion has a guide inclined surface (for example, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360) that guides the game ball that has reached the restricting portion to the forming position. The gaming machine according to the feature H1.

As shown in the feature H1, in the configuration in which the movement of the guide passage forming portion from the non-formed position to the formed position precedes the movement of the regulated portion from the regulated position to the allowable position, the movement of the regulated portion is the flow path forming portion. The delay in the movement of the ball may give the player the impression that the player has missed the opportunity to enter the ball due to the spilling of the game ball that should have entered the ball. It is assumed that this hinders the various effects shown in the feature H1. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the game ball that has fallen to the regulation portion while the guide path is being formed is guided to the formation position (guide path formation portion side), the game ball enters the game ball. You can give a ball opportunity. Therefore, it is difficult to give the impression that the movement of the regulation part is delayed from the movement of the flow path forming part as a factor to miss the opportunity to enter the ball, and it is preferably suppressed from being a factor to reduce the player's motivation to play. can.

Feature H3. The game according to feature H2, wherein the restricting portion is configured such that the moving direction of the gaming ball moving to the forming position along the guiding inclined surface is a direction away from the entering portion. Machine.

Assuming that the movement of the game ball is restricted at a position close to the ball entry section, the game ball that was being regulated flows into the ball entry section as soon as the regulation section moves to the allowable position. There is concern that it will be difficult to visually confirm the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the game ball guided to the formation position by the inclined surface is configured to be away from the ball entry portion, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Features H4. The feature H2 or feature H3 is characterized in that the guide path forming portion is formed so that the inclination angle of the guide path with respect to the horizontal plane is equal to or larger than the inclination angle of the guide inclined surface with respect to the horizontal plane. The described gaming machine.

When the game ball that has fallen to the regulation section side is guided to the guide path side as shown in the feature H2 or the like, if the guided game ball jumps over the guide path, the effect shown in the feature H2 or the like is obtained. It is expected that it will not be exhibited well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the behavior of such a game ball can be suppressed by setting the inclination angle of the guide path with respect to the horizontal plane to be equal to or larger than the inclination angle of the guide inclined surface with respect to the horizontal plane.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H4, wherein the regulation unit is configured to interrupt a position in the middle of the guide path in a state of being arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in the feature H1, in the configuration in which the formation of the guide path is preceded, a plurality of game balls blocked by the regulation portion can flow into the entry portion at once as the regulation is lifted. Such movement of the game ball is preferable in enhancing the visual impact. Here, as shown in this feature, if the regulating portion is arranged at an intermediate position of the guiding path and the guiding path extends to the downstream side of the regulating portion, the movement of the game ball as described above. When this occurs, the moving distance of the game ball group can be increased, and the chance that the movement of the game ball is overlooked can be reduced.

Feature H6. In the guide path forming portion, the passage length of the portion of the guide path located upstream of the regulated position by the regulated portion is longer than the radial dimension of the gaming ball, and the regulated portion is arranged at the regulated position. The game ball whose movement to the entry portion side is hindered by the portion is described in any one of the feature H1 to the feature H5, which is capable of waiting on the guide path forming portion. Game machine.

According to the feature H6, after the regulation is lifted by the regulation section, the game ball located on the guide path quickly heads to the entry section, which can contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

In particular, in embodying the technical ideas shown in the features H2 to H4, it is possible to give a difference in the degree of density of the game balls toward the entry portion by combining with the configuration shown in the present features. .. This is preferable in order to prevent the movement of the game ball toward the entry portion from becoming monotonous.

Feature H7. The regulation unit is maintained at the regulation position when the variable ball entry means is in the non-acceptance state.
When the variable ball entry means is switched to the receiving state, the guide path forming unit is configured to move to the forming position under the condition that the restricting unit is arranged at the restricted position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H6.

Features As shown in H1 and the like, when the variable ball entry means is switched to the receiving state, various effects can be expected by removing the movement restriction by the regulation unit after forming the guide path. However, if the movement of the variable ball entry means becomes complicated, there is a concern that the operation period will be extended and the responsiveness when switching between the accepted state and the non-accepted state will decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the variable ball entry means is switched to the receiving state, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by setting the regulating unit in the regulated position in advance. ..

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the regulation unit is configured to prevent the ball from entering the ball entry unit when the regulation unit is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in the feature H7, when the regulation part is arranged in the regulation position in the non-accepting state, the shutter is separately configured by preventing the ball from entering the ball entry part by the regulation part. It is possible to avoid an unexpected (accidental) entry of a ball without using the above. That is, the regulation unit has both a function of restricting the movement of the game ball along the guide path and a function of preventing the ball from entering the ball entry unit, so that the complexity of the configuration can be suppressed.

Feature H9. The guide path forming portion is configured to be arranged at the formed position and the non-formed position by sliding movement in the thickness direction of the game board.
When the variable ball entry means is switched from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, the restricting portion is moved from the allowable position to the restricted position under the condition that the guide path forming portion is arranged at the forming position. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H1 to the feature H8, which is characterized in that it is configured to be restored.

The game ball moving along the guide path gains momentum toward the entry part. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to prevent the ball from entering by retracting (sliding) the guide path forming portion to the non-forming position, there is a concern that the game ball will enter the entering portion as it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience by preceding the movement of the regulatory unit at the end of acceptance, as opposed to at the start of acceptance.

Feature H10. The ball entry section is the first ball entry section.
A second ball entry section (second ball entry section 341) provided separately from the first ball entry section is provided.
The regulation unit has a function of forming a guide path for guiding a game ball located on the regulation unit to the second ball entry unit when the regulation unit is arranged at the regulation position.
The guide path forming portion is arranged at the non-guided position, and the restricted portion is arranged at the restricted position so that the gaming ball that has reached the restricted portion enters the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features H1 to the feature H9.

If the game ball that has reached the regulation section is guided to the second entry section by the regulation section, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. Further, since the regulating unit also has a function of forming a guide path to the second ball entry portion, it is possible to suitably suppress the complexity of the configuration of the entire device.

Features H11. In the state where the guide path forming portion is arranged at the formation position, the guide path forming portion restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the second ball entry portion side along the restricting portion. The gaming machine according to the feature H10.

According to the feature H11, when the guide path forming portion is arranged at the formation position, the guide path by the restricting portion is cut off by the guide path forming portion, and the movement of the game ball to the second entry portion is restricted. Become. In this way, the guide path forming unit has a function of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section and a function of restricting the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entry section. It is possible to suitably suppress the complication of the device due to the diversification of the above.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to G may be applied to the features H1 to H11.

<Characteristic I group>
The following feature group I describes: "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of gaming by the variable ball-entry means." It is a thing.

Features I1. A ball-entry means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) having a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed and in which a game ball can enter the game area. Is a gaming machine equipped with
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331), the second entry section (second entry section 341), and
Movable body (movable body 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, 450W) formed with a rolling surface (for example, upper surface 452R, 452U, 472V, 452W) that is rotatably supported and the game ball can roll. When,
It has a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) that drives the movable body, and has a drive unit.
A posture changing means (MPU of the main control device 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by the drive control of the drive unit is provided.
The posture changing means is
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion, the game ball is guided to the first ball entry portion. The first guide path forming means for forming the first guide path (first guide path GP1), and
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion, the game ball is guided to the second ball entry portion. A gaming machine characterized by having a second guide path forming means for forming a second guide path (second guide path GP2).

For example, when the guide means dedicated to the first ball entry section and the guide means dedicated to the second ball entry section are separately provided, the ball entry device can be increased by increasing the receiving width of the game ball in the guide means. The occupied area of is greatly increased. In such a configuration, there is a concern that restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger in order to coexist with other game parts in the game area. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, a movable body (rolling surface) that functions as a guiding means is shared, and the inclined destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. Therefore, as compared with the case where the movable body (rolling surface) is individually provided as described above, the receiving width can be increased while suppressing the expansion of the occupied area of the movable body.

Further, for example, when a movable body for guidance is provided for each ball entry section, each ball entry section becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) due to having a plurality of ball entry sections can be expected. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the guide destination is changed according to the change in the posture by using the movable body shared by the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. Is supposed to pay attention to the movement of the movable body while imagining which guide destination it will be. As a result, an effect (effect of improving attention) that exceeds the effect of simply increasing the number of ball entry portions can be expected.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
With the ball-entry means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) provided in the game area,
It is equipped with a game state transition means for shifting the game state to the special game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (a function of executing the game state shift process in the MPU of the main control device 162).
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode) and a second special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode) are provided.
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331), which is the entry destination of the game ball when the first special game state is reached,
The second ball entry section (second entry section 341), which is the entry destination of the game ball when the second special game state is reached,
A movable body (movable body 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, 450W) having a rolling surface (for example, upper surface 452R, 452U, 472V, 452W) that is rotatably supported and the game ball can roll.
It has a drive unit (drive motor 321) for driving the movable body, and has a drive unit (drive motor 321).
A posture changing means (MPU of the main control device 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by the drive control of the drive unit is provided.
The posture changing means is
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion in the first special gaming state. , A first guide path forming means for forming a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first ball entry portion, and
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion in the second special gaming state. , The gaming machine characterized by having a second guide path forming means for forming a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion.

For example, it is possible to diversify the game by separately providing a guide means dedicated to the first ball entry section and a guide means dedicated to the second ball entry section and changing the guide destination of the game ball according to the game state. Is preferable. However, in such a configuration, by trying to increase the receiving width of the game ball in the guiding means, the occupied area of the ball entry device becomes large. In such a configuration, there is a concern that restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become stronger in order to coexist with other game parts in the game area. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, a movable body (rolling surface) that functions as a guiding means is shared, and the inclined destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. Therefore, as compared with the case where the movable body (rolling surface) is individually provided as described above, the receiving width can be increased while suppressing the expansion of the occupied area of the movable body.

Further, for example, when a movable body for guidance is provided for each ball entry section, each ball entry section becomes independent, and only the effect (diversification) due to having a plurality of ball entry sections can be expected. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the guide destination is changed according to the change in the posture by using the movable body shared by the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. Is supposed to pay attention to the movable body while imagining which destination will be. As a result, an effect (effect of improving attention) that exceeds the effect of simply increasing the number of ball entry portions can be expected.

Feature I3. The movable body is in any of the first guide state forming the first guide path, the second guide state forming the second guide path, and the first entry portion and the second entry portion. It is possible to switch to the non-guided state where the game ball is not guided,
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state when the gaming state is not the special gaming state.

When the gaming state is not in the special gaming state (for example, when it is in the normal gaming state), the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state, and the ball enters the first entry section and the second entry section. Be avoided. As described above, it is preferable to enable the movable body to be switched between the first guided state / the second guided state / the non-guided state in order to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entry device.

Feature I4. The first privilege is given to the player based on the entry into the first ball entry section, and the second benefit different from the first benefit is given based on the entry into the second entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I3, which is provided with a privilege granting means (payout device 224) to be given to the player.

When a plurality of ball entry sections are used in combination, it is possible to promote the diversification of games by providing a difference in the benefits that can be obtained. In such a configuration, when the first ball entry device including the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry device including the second ball entry portion are individually provided, the occupied area of each of the ball entry devices is provided. Is bulky. Therefore, by diversifying the games, it becomes difficult for the ball entry device and peripheral parts to coexist, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device become stronger. Therefore, by applying the technical idea shown in the feature I1 or the like to the configuration shown in the present feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience and realize a practically preferable configuration.

Feature I5. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction.
The game according to any one of the features I1 to I4, wherein the movable body is arranged between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion in the predetermined direction. Machine.

As shown in the feature I5, if the movable body is arranged between the two ball entry portions, it can contribute to the miniaturization of the movable body and the reduction of the amount of change in the posture (moving region) of the movable body.

Feature I6. The rotation center portion of the movable body is located between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion.
The first guide path forming means forms the first guide path by rotating the movable body in a first predetermined direction.
The feature I1 characterized in that the second guide path forming means forms the second guide path by rotating the movable body in a second predetermined direction opposite to the first predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I5.

According to the feature I6, the rotation direction when forming the first guide path and the rotation direction when forming the second guide path are opposite directions. With such a configuration, the operating region can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the movable body is limited to one direction.

Feature I7. The movable body is in any of the first guide state forming the first guide path, the second guide state forming the second guide path, and the first entry portion and the second entry portion. It is possible to switch to the non-guided state where the game ball is not guided,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state.
The rotation direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guided state to the first guided state is opposite to the rotating direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guided state to the second guided state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I6.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to switch from the non-guidance state to the second guidance state without going through the first guidance state. Further, it is possible to switch from the non-guidance state to the first guidance state without going through the second guidance state. This can contribute to the improvement of responsiveness when switching to the guidance state.

Feature I8. The movable body is in any of the first guide state forming the first guide path, the second guide state forming the second guide path, and the first entry portion and the second entry portion. It is possible to switch to the non-guided state where the game ball is not guided,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state.
The description in any one of the features I1 to I7, wherein in the standby state, the entry of the ball into the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section is restricted by the movable body. Gaming machine.

According to the feature I8, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the movable body restricts the entry of the ball into each entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the accidental entry of a ball into each entry portion in a situation where the special gaming state is not achieved.

Feature I9. The first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion are arranged so that the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other.
The game ball flowing down the game area is configured to enter the first ball entry section and the second entry section through the region between the first entry section and the second entry section.
When the movable body is in the standby state, the area between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion is covered by the movable body from the upstream side in the gaming area. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I8.

According to the feature I9, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the movable body restricts the entry of the ball into each entry portion. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the accidental entry of a ball into each entry portion in a situation where the special gaming state is not achieved.

Feature I10. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side.
The movable body is configured such that the rolling surface faces upward when the movable body is in the standby state.
The rolling surface constitutes a portion of the rolling surface that becomes the first ball entry portion side when the movable body is in the standby state, and is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion side. A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 453R) and a portion on the rolling surface that is on the side of the second ball entry portion, and a second inclination that is downwardly inclined toward the second ball entry portion side. The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that it has a portion (for example, a second inclined portion 454R).

According to the feature I9, the game ball that has reached the ball entry means in the standby state is divided into the first ball entry portion side and the second entry portion side and flows down. With such a configuration, the ball entry means can function as a branching portion for branching the flow path of the game ball.

Feature I11. The second inclined portion is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion in a state where the first guide path is formed, and the first inclined portion is in a state where the second guide path is formed. The gaming machine according to the feature I10, which is formed so as to have a downward slope on the side of the second ball entry portion.

According to the feature I11, in the first guide state, the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion form the first guide path, and in the second guide state, the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion form the second guide path. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the existence of these inclined portions from becoming a factor of shortening the total length of the guide path.

Further, the inclination angle of the first guide path is tighter on the downstream side than on the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the first ball entry portion, the distance between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over-winning). Similarly, the inclination angle of the second guide path is tighter on the downstream side than on the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the second ball portion, the distance between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over-winning).

Feature I12. A wall portion (wall portion 491W) is formed on at least one of the front side and the rear side of the movable body.
When the game ball comes into contact with the portion overlapping the movement path (detour passages TE1 and TE2) in which the game ball moves along the movable body in the standby state on the wall portion, the game ball is decelerated. Deceleration parts (projections 492W, 493W) are formed to cause the vehicle to move.
The gaming machine according to feature I10 or feature I11, wherein the deceleration unit is arranged so as to avoid contact with a gaming ball passing through the first guide path or the second guide path. ..

For example, in a configuration in which the movable body repeatedly switches between the standby state and the guided state, the player can suppress unnecessary investment by devising a firing operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during the standby state. .. If such technical intervention is permitted, there will be a difference in the benefits and the like obtained according to the skill of the player. This can be an obstacle in improving the fairness of the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has reached the movable body during the standby state does not immediately separate from the movable body, but its movement is delayed. The game ball that reaches the movable body and moves slowly during the standby state is guided to the entry portion by switching the movable body to the guided state. In this way, if the configuration is such that an opportunity to enter the ball entry section is given, wasteful investment can be suppressed without refraining from launching the game ball in anticipation of the standby state. As a result, the above-mentioned problem related to fairness can be suitably solved.

However, when the deceleration part suppresses the acceleration of the game ball, the action on the game ball toward the ball entry part gives the player the impression that the ball entry is unnecessarily delayed, and the player It is feared that it will be a factor to reduce the motivation to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed by devising the arrangement of the deceleration section so that the game ball passing through the first guide path and the second guide path does not come into contact with the deceleration section. ..

Feature I13. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side.
The length of the first guide path and the length of the second guide path in the side-by-side direction are configured to be equal to the separation distance between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I12.

According to the feature I13, in the first guidance state, the game ball falling toward the space between the first ball entry section and the second entry section is guided to the first entry section, and in the second guidance state, the first entry ball is introduced. It is possible to guide the game ball that falls between the section and the second entry section to the second entry section. As a result, the gap between the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part can be used as the inflow port to the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part, and each of them suppresses the increase in size of the ball entry means. It is possible to increase the receiving width of the game ball in the ball entry portion.

Feature I14. A housing unit (accommodation unit 461U) for accommodating the movable body is provided.
Described in any one of the features I1 to I13, wherein the movable body is configured to be prevented from protruding into the gaming area when the movable body is housed in the housing portion. Gaming machine.

In the configuration in which the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball as shown in the feature I1 or the like, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the shaft support portion. This hinders the stabilization of the posture of the movable body. Therefore, if the movable body is retracted to the accommodating portion as shown in this feature, unnecessary contact with the game ball can be suppressed and the shaft support portion can be protected.

Further, by retracting the movable body to the accommodating portion, the front of the movable body can be utilized as a passing area of the game ball. As a result, the restrictions on the flow path of the game ball can be relaxed.

Feature I15. The feature is that the first operating region through which the movable body passes when forming the first guide path and the second operating region through which the movable body passes when forming the second guide path overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I1 to the feature I14.

According to the feature I15, if the operating areas of the movable body are overlapped, the useless expansion of the operating area of the movable body can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I16. The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 430N) arranged on the first ball entry portion side and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body) arranged on the second ball entry portion side. It is composed of 2 movable bodies 440N).
One of the features I1 to I15 characterized in that the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by rotating the first movable body and the second movable body, respectively. The described gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if each guide path is formed by a combination of the first movable body on the first ball entry portion side and the second movable body on the second ball entry portion side, the operating region of the movable body Unnecessary spread can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I17. The rotation directions of the first movable body and the second movable body when forming the first guide path are the same, and the first movable body and the said when forming the second guide path. The gaming machine according to feature I16, wherein the second movable body is rotated in the same direction.

As shown in the feature I17, the drive mechanism can be simplified by unifying the rotation direction of each movable body. This is preferable in order to realize the miniaturization of the ball entry device.

Feature I18. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, the movable body constituting the upstream portion of the guide path is arranged at a forming position where the rotation tip portion rises to form the guide path, and the movable body constituting the downstream portion. Is configured to be placed at the formation position where the rotating tip descends to form a guide path.
When the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the formation position, a rotation restricting unit (for example, guide grooves 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N) for restricting further rotation is provided. The gaming machine according to the feature I16 or the feature I17.

According to the feature I18, the impact can be absorbed by the sinking of the movable body in the upstream portion of the guide path, and the deviation of the rotation position of the movable body can be suppressed in the downstream portion to suppress the variation in the movement to the inlet portion. This can contribute to the smooth guidance of the game ball.

Feature I19. In the standby state in which the game ball is not guided to either the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion, the first movable body is arranged at a position covering the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion and is the first. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features I16 to I18, wherein the movable body is arranged at a position covering the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion.

As shown in the feature I19, when each movable body functions as a lid covering the entrance portion of the ball entry portion, a certain size is secured for the movable body. By forming the guide path using such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid unnecessarily increasing the occupied area by the movable body when the guide path is lengthened to increase the receiving width of the game ball.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to H may be applied to the features I1 to I19.

<Characteristic J group>
The following feature J group is described as "in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to improve the degree of attention to the gaming."

Features J1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a guide unit (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V) for guiding a game ball is provided in the game area.
The guide portion includes a first rotation center portion (for example, lower shaft portion 432N, upper shaft portion 441N, second shaft portion 482V) and a second rotation center portion (for example, upper shaft portion 431N, lower shaft portion 442N). It has a first shaft portion 481V) and rotates around the first rotation center portion to form a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1), and is centered on the second rotation center portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) is formed by rotating to.

If the guide portion provided in the game area changes the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. In the guide portion shown in this feature, the rotation center portion when forming the first guide path and the rotation center portion when forming the second guide path have different configurations. With such a configuration, in forming two guide paths using the guide portion, it is possible to suppress unnecessary expansion of the operating area of the guide portion and improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide portion. This is advantageous in exerting the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

Features J2. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) capable of entering a gaming ball in the gaming area. There,
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331), the second entry section (second entry section 341), and
First rotation center (for example, lower shaft part 432N, upper shaft part 441N, second shaft part 482V) and second rotation center part (for example, upper shaft part 431N, lower shaft part 442N, first shaft part 481V) ), And by rotating around the first rotation center portion, a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed, and the first guide path is formed. 2 A guide portion (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N,) that forms a second guide path (for example, the second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second entry portion by rotating around the center portion. A gaming machine characterized by having 470V).

If the guide portion provided in the game area changes the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and the degree of attention to the game can be improved. In the guide portion shown in this feature, the rotation center portion when forming the first guide path and the rotation center portion when forming the second guide path have different configurations. With such a configuration, in forming two guide paths using the guide portion, it is possible to suppress unnecessary expansion of the operating area of the guide portion and improve the degree of freedom in arranging the guide portion. This is advantageous in exerting the above-mentioned effect of improving the degree of attention.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83R) in which a game ball can enter the game area. ) Is provided, and the ball entry means is a first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341). It has a moving center portion (for example, upper shaft portion 431N, lower shaft portion 432N, upper shaft portion 441N, lower shaft portion 442N, first shaft portion 481V, second shaft portion 482V), and one of the rotation center portions. A first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed by rotating around the center, and the ball is rotated about the other of the rotation center portions. A game characterized by being provided with a guide portion (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V) forming a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion. It is also possible to say "machine."

Feature J3. The rotation direction of the guide portion when the first guide path is formed by rotation around the first rotation center portion, and the second rotation by rotation around the second rotation center portion. The gaming machine according to feature J2, characterized in that the direction of rotation of the guide portion when forming a guide path is opposite to that of the guide portion.

According to the feature J3, the passing area (operating range) through which the guide portion passes when forming the first guide path and the passing area (operating range) through which the guide portion passes when forming the second guide path are defined. Can be duplicated. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary expansion of the operating range as compared with the case where the operating range for the guide portion is individually secured.

Features J4. The passage region through which the guide portion passes when the first guide path is formed by rotation around the first rotation center portion, and the first rotation around the second rotation center portion. 2. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or feature J3, characterized in that at least a part thereof overlaps with a passing area through which the guide portion passes when forming a guide path.

If the passage areas (operating ranges) when forming each guide path are overlapped at least in a part as shown in the feature J4, the operating range for the guide unit is individually secured as compared with the case where the operating range is individually secured. The expansion of the operating range can be suppressed. As a result, the occupied area of the ball entering means can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entering means can be dramatically increased.

Feature J5. The guide portion is arranged between the first entry portion and the second entry portion, and extends in the parallel direction of the first entry portion and the second entry portion.
The first rotation center portion is arranged at the end portion of the guide portion on the side of the second ball entry portion.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J2 to J4, wherein the second rotation center portion is arranged at an end portion of the guide portion on the side of the first ball entry portion.

When the guide path is formed, the rotation center portion that is the starting point is located at the most upstream portion of the guide path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from hitting a portion on the upstream side of the rotation center portion. Even when the game ball hits the guide portion and the flow direction changes, it is possible to prevent the pressing force of the game ball from acting to encourage the guide portion to return to the position before rotation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the posture of the guide portion from being disturbed by hitting the game ball.

Features J6. When the guide portion is rotated around one of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion, the ball entry means has the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion. Feature J2 to feature characterized by having a regulating portion (guide groove 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N, 483V, 484V) that regulates the rotation of the guide portion centered on the other side of the rotation center portion. The gaming machine described in any one of J5.

When the two rotation center portions are used in combination, the stability when operating the guide portion may decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the rotation around both rotation centers is regulated, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature J7. The first ball entry section and the second ball entry section are arranged side by side, and the entrance portion (entrance portion 332) of the first ball entry section and the entrance portion (entrance portion 342) of the second ball entry section face each other. It is arranged in this way,
The game ball that has reached the ball entry means enters the first entry section and the second entry section through the region (specific area SE) sandwiched between the first entry section and the second entry section. It is composed and
One of the features J2 to J6, wherein the guide portion is arranged at a predetermined position that covers the region sandwiched by the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion from above. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature J7, the guide portion can prevent the ball from entering the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. When the guide portion rotates from this state, the first inclined passage and the second inclined passage are formed. At this time, the ball entry portion that guides the game ball rolling on the guide portion. It can be moved to and given an opportunity to enter the ball. Further, when the first guide path is formed, it becomes easier to enter the second ball entry portion, and when the second guide path is formed, it becomes easier to enter the first ball entry portion. Can be suppressed.

In particular, in combination with the feature J4 or the like, since the rotation center portion is located closer to the ball entry portion on the opposite side of the guide destination, the rotation angle when forming the guide path can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the movement of the game ball and prevent the above-mentioned movement of the game ball from becoming difficult to follow with the eyes. This is preferable in order to improve the player's attention to the movement of the game ball.

Features J8. When the guide portion is arranged at the predetermined position, the positions of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion are the initial positions.
The ball entry means includes a first urging means (second urging member 486V) that urges the first rotation center portion of the guide portion to the initial position, and the second rotation center of the guide portion. It has a second urging means (first urging member 485V) that urges the portion to the initial position.
In a situation where the guide portion is arranged at the predetermined position, the second rotation center portion descends against the urging force of the second urging means, so that the first ball entry portion side. The first guide path is formed, and the first rotation center portion descends against the urging force of the first urging means to incline toward the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature J7, characterized in that a guide path is formed.

According to the configuration shown in the feature J8, the drive mechanism for enabling the switching between the first guide path and the second guide path can be simplified. Further, when the game ball hits the guide portion arranged at a predetermined position, the impact can be mitigated by both urging means. By protecting the guide portion in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the durability of the ball entry means.

Features J9. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (game board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable winning unit 83V) capable of entering a gaming ball in the gaming area. There,
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and the second entry section (second entry section 341) arranged side by side,
It has a guide unit (movable body 470V) capable of guiding the game ball to the first guide unit and the second guide unit.
The guide portion is arranged between the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion, and extends in the parallel direction of the first ball entry portion and the second ball entry portion.
The game ball is guided to the first ball entry portion by changing the height position of either the end portion on the first ball entry portion side or the end portion on the second ball entry portion side in the guide portion. The first guide path (guide path GP1) is formed, and the height positions of the other end of the guide portion on the side of the first ball entry portion and the end portion on the side of the second ball entry portion change. A gaming machine characterized in that a second guide path (guide path GP1) for guiding a game ball to a second entry portion is formed.

As shown in the feature J9, the first guide path is formed by changing the height position of one of both ends of the guide portion, and the second guide path is formed by changing the height position of the other. If so, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the initial position (posture) of the guide portion while diversifying the guide routes. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the ball entry means can be improved.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to I may be applied to the features J1 to J9.

<Characteristic K group>
The following feature K group is described as "In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player are provided. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of gaming by the variable ball-entry means." It is a thing.

Features K1. A gaming machine provided with a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed.
An entry portion (for example, entry portion 331) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and a ball entry portion 331.
A privilege giving means (for example, a payout device 224) that grants a privilege to a player based on the entry into the ball entry portion, and
It is provided with a guiding means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, 440Q) that can switch between a guiding state for guiding the game ball to the ball entry portion and a non-guidance state without the guidance.
As the guidance state, a first guidance state for guiding the gaming ball flowing down the first region (for example, the first region GE1) to the ball entry portion, and a second region including the first region and wider than the first region. A gaming machine characterized in that a second guiding state is provided for guiding a gaming ball flowing down (for example, the first region GE1 and the second region GE2) to the ball entry portion.

According to the feature K1, the guiding means is switched from the non-guided state to the guided state, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the entry portion. Here, the first guide state and the second guide state are provided as the guide states, and in the second guide state, the area to be guided is expanded with respect to the first guide state. Therefore, in the second guide state, the probability of entering the ball is higher than in the first guide state. By realizing the diversification of ball entry modes and making a difference in the size of the benefits obtained in this way, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In the game area, a first flow path for guiding the game ball to the first area and a second flow path for guiding the game ball to a portion outside the first area in the second area may be arranged side by side. ..

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game machine provided with a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and is provided in the game area so that a game ball can enter. A ball-entry portion (for example, a ball-entry portion 331) and a guiding means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, 440Q) for guiding the game ball to the ball-entry portion are provided, and the guiding means is a first region (for example). For example, a first guide state for guiding a gaming ball flowing down the first region GE1) to the ball entry portion and a second region wider than the first region (for example, the first region GE1 and the second region GE2) are flown down. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized in that it can be switched to a second guiding state in which the gaming ball is guided to the ball entry portion. "

Feature K2. The guiding means forms a first inclined passage that is inclined down to the entry portion when the first guiding state is reached, receives the game ball that has flowed down to the first region, and directs the flow direction of the game ball. The guidance is performed by changing the inclination direction of the first inclined passage, and the second inclined passage is formed so as to be inclined down to the ball entry portion by being in the second guidance state. The guidance is performed by receiving the game ball that has flowed down to the area and changing the flow direction of the game ball to the direction of inclination of the second inclined passage.
The second inclined passage formed in the second guided state is characterized in that the first inclined passage formed in the first guided state is extended to the side opposite to the ball entry portion. Features The gaming machine described in K1.

As shown in this feature, if the region to be guided is expanded by changing the total length of the inclined passage so as to be extended to the upstream side of the inclined passage, the player can receive the first guidance state and the first guidance state. The difference in the advantage of the second guidance state can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the movement of the guiding means can be partially shared between the case of the first guidance state and the case of the second guidance state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to the operation from becoming excessively complicated in order to realize the diversification of the game as shown in the feature K1.

Feature K3. The guiding means has a first movable body (first movable body 430Q) and a second movable body (second movable body 440Q), and in the first guiding state, the first movable body is arranged at a passage forming position. As a result, the first inclined passage is formed, and in the second guided state, the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the passage forming position so that the second inclined passage is formed. The gaming machine according to feature K2, which is characterized by being configured.

As shown in the feature K3, if the first movable body and the second movable body are used in combination to form the inclined passage, the responsiveness is responsive even when the relatively long second inclined passage is formed. The decrease can be suitably suppressed.

Features K4. In the second guide state, the first movable body forms a downstream portion of the second inclined passage, and the second movable body forms an upstream portion of the second inclined passage.
The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the upstream portion formed by the second movable body is displaced upward from an extension of the downstream portion formed by the first movable body.

When a series of second inclined passages are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed by the game ball being caught in the joint portion thereof. When the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball, its position accuracy may decrease due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by arranging the second movable body forming the upstream portion so as to be offset (offset) above the extension of the downstream portion, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suitably suppressed. can.

Feature K5. The first movable body and the second movable body are rotatable along the front surface of the game board, and face each other across the second region.
When the guide portion is switched to the second guide state, the structure is such that the first movable body and the second movable body are rotated toward each other to form the second inclined passage. The gaming machine according to feature K3 or feature K4.

As shown in the feature K5, if the second inclined passage is formed by rotating each movable body toward each other, the appearance when forming the second inclined passage can be greatly changed. .. Thereby, the impact when the second inclined passage which is advantageous to the player is formed can be strengthened.

Features K6. The first movable body and the second movable body extend vertically, and the first movable body and the second movable body extend vertically.
The first movable body is pivotally supported so that its lower end portion serves as a rotation base end portion.
The second movable body is pivotally supported so that its upper end portion serves as a rotation base end portion.
Described in feature K5, wherein the rotation direction of the first movable body and the rotation direction of the second movable body when forming the second inclined passage are configured to be the same direction. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body forming the inclined passage can be made to stand by in a vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the game ball collides with the movable body in the non-guided state in which the inclined passage is not formed.

Further, by making the shaft support points of each movable body upside down and the rotation direction the same, it is possible to reduce the amount of rotation when forming the second inclined passage. As a result, even when the second inclined passage having a long passage length is formed, it is possible to prevent the operation period from being extended and the responsiveness from being lowered.

Feature K7. The movement of the first movable body when the first movable body is arranged at the passage forming position and the movement of the second movable body when the second movable body is arranged at the passage forming position are synchronized with each other. The gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized in that the switching to the second guidance state is performed in this way.

As shown in this feature, it is advantageous to have a configuration in which the movements of both movable bodies are synchronized in order to enhance the responsiveness of switching to the second guide state. However, when trying to pursue responsiveness in this way, there is a high possibility that the game ball will be caught between both movable bodies. In this respect, in combination with the feature K6, even if the game ball is pinched, even if it is incomplete, a passage having a downward slope can be formed on the entry portion side as a whole. It is possible to suppress the progress of the game without the guidance function being exerted at all. This is preferable in suppressing the disadvantage of the player.

Features K8. A regulating unit for restricting further rotation when the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the passage forming position is provided.
The length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip portion of the second movable body is the same as or greater than the length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip portion of the second movable body. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or feature K7, which is characterized by being shortened.

When the movable bodies are rotatable, a force that rotates the movable bodies is applied by the collision of the game balls. With respect to the first movable body, when the second inclined passage is formed, further rotation is hindered by the restricting portion, so that even if the first movable body is pushed by the game ball, the change in posture can be avoided. On the other hand, in the case of the second movable body, when the second inclined passage is formed, the direction in which the rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is the direction in which the regulation portion prevents further rotation. It is the opposite of the regulation direction. That is, it cannot be expected that the regulation portion for the second movable body is prevented from rotating due to the collision of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for the second movable body that is easily affected by the collision of the game ball, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by making the total length the same as or shorter than that of the first movable body. can.

Features K9. The movement of the first movable body when switching from the non-guided state to the first guided state is the same as the movement of the first movable body when switching from the non-guided state to the second guided state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K3 to the feature K8.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the exposure of whether the movement of the first movable body is switched to the first guided state or the second guided state when the state is switched to the guided state. In this way, it is difficult to guess whether the movement of the first movable body is switched to the first guide state or the second guide state, which is advantageous in improving the player's attention to the game. ..

Features K10. A first passage (first downstream side passage portion 337Q) and a second passage (second downstream side passage portion 338Q) through which the game ball passes are formed in the ball entry portion.
The game ball guided to the ball entry portion from a portion other than the first region in the second region flows into the second passage from the game ball guided from the first region to the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K9, which is configured to be easy to play.

In this feature, although the guide destination is the entry portion, the destination after entering the ball differs depending on which route is taken. With such a configuration, further diversification of games can be realized.

For example, in combination with the feature K2, the total length of the inclined passage formed in each guide state is different. Specifically, the second inclined passage has a longer overall length than the first inclined passage, and the acceleration section becomes longer. Considering that there is a difference in the moving speed of the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the moving destination changes due to such a speed difference.

Features K11. A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.
The guide means is provided with a switching means for switching between the non-guidance state, the first guide state, and the second guide state (a function of setting the state switching control in the MPU of the main control device 162).
As the switching mode by the switching means, a first switching mode for alternately switching between the non-guided state and the first guided state and a second switching mode for alternately switching between the non-guided state and the second guided state are provided. And
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K10, characterized in that the means for shifting the switching mode in the special gaming state from the first switching mode to the second switching mode is provided.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by changing from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, it is possible to accelerate the acquisition frequency of benefits (for example, the increasing speed of the ball held), the progress speed of the game, and the like. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the game from becoming monotonous in the special game state.

Feature K12. As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result A) and a second special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R jackpot result B) are provided.
The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the period of the second switching mode is different between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state.

According to the feature K12, the period in which the second switching mode is advantageous to the player due to the transferred special gaming state, that is, the acquisition frequency of the privilege (for example, the increasing speed of the ball held) and the period in which the progress speed of the game is accelerated change. do. With such a configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the monotonicization of the game in the special game state.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to J may be applied to the features K1 to K12.

<Characteristic L group>
The following feature L group is described in that "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters the ball entry means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry means variable and switching the ball-entry means between the accepted state and the non-accepted state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to realize the diversification of gaming by the variable ball-entry means." It is a thing.

Feature L1. A game in which a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) capable of entering a game ball is provided in the game area. It ’s a machine,
The ball entry means
The first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and the second entry section (second entry section 341) into which the game ball enters,
The first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry section, the second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry section, and the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. A guide unit (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched to a non-planned state that does not guide the game ball to any of them,
It has a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) for operating the movable body, and has a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321).
A control unit (MPU of the main control device 162) that controls the drive of the drive unit is provided.
The control unit includes means for bringing the guide unit into the first guide state by controlling the drive unit to be in the first drive mode (for example, rotation in a first specific direction). It is characterized by having a means for putting the guide unit into the second guide state by controlling the drive mode of the drive unit to be the second drive mode (for example, rotation in a second specific direction). A gaming machine.

Having multiple ball entry sections in the game area and using a variable guide section to guide the game ball to each entry section realizes diversification of the game and attracts attention to the game. It is preferable for improvement. However, if a drive unit (actuator) is arranged for each ball entry unit, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will be complicated.

In this respect, as shown in this feature, the game is that the guide unit is set to the first guide state by setting the drive mode of the drive unit to the first drive mode, and the guide unit is set to the second guide state by setting the drive mode to the second drive mode. If the configuration is such that the guide destination of the ball is switched, that is, the configuration is switched between the non-guided state / the first guided state / the second guided state depending on the driving mode, the electric configuration of the gaming machine is suppressed from becoming complicated, and the game is played. Diversification can be realized.

Feature L2. A game in which a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) capable of entering a game ball is provided in the game area. It ’s a machine,
The ball entry means
A first ball entry section (first entry section 331) and a second entry section (second entry section 341) into which a game ball flowing down the game area enters.
The first guidance state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the first entry section, and the second guiding state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the second entry section. A guide unit (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can switch between a guide state and a non-planned state in which the game ball is not guided to either the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit.
It has a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) for operating the movable body, and has a drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321).
A control unit (MPU of the main control device 162) that controls the drive of the drive unit is provided.
The control unit
When the guide unit is in the non-guidance state, the guide unit is controlled by controlling the drive mode of the drive unit to be the first drive mode (for example, rotation in the first specific direction). Means to switch to the first guidance state,
When the guide unit is in the non-guidance state, the guide unit is controlled by controlling the drive mode of the drive unit so as to be in the second drive mode (for example, rotation in a second specific direction). A gaming machine characterized by having a means for switching to a second guidance state.

Having multiple ball entry sections in the game area and using a variable guide section to guide the game ball to each entry section realizes diversification of the game and attracts attention to the game. It is preferable for improvement. However, if a drive unit (actuator) is arranged for each ball entry unit, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine will be complicated.

In this respect, as shown in this feature, the game is that the guide unit is set to the first guide state by setting the drive mode of the drive unit to the first drive mode, and the guide unit is set to the second guide state by setting the drive mode to the second drive mode. If the configuration is such that the guide destination of the ball is switched, that is, the configuration is switched between the non-guided state / the first guided state / the second guided state depending on the driving mode, the electric configuration of the gaming machine is suppressed from becoming complicated, and the game is played. Diversification can be realized.

Feature L3. In the first drive mode, the control unit performs drive control so that the output shaft (output shaft 322) of the drive unit operates in the first specific direction, and in the second drive mode, the output shaft operates. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, characterized in that the drive control is performed so as to operate in the second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction.

When switching the guide destination depending on the difference in the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in the feature L1, etc., when switching the state by reversing the operation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit as shown in this feature. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation stability of the. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine due to a malfunction or the like by a simple configuration.

Feature L4. The drive unit is a motor.
The control unit rotates the motor in the first specific direction in the first drive mode, and rotates the motor in a second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction in the second drive mode. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, which is characterized in that it is configured to be used.

When switching the guide destination depending on the difference in the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in the feature L1 or the like, the state is switched by setting the rotation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit in the opposite direction as shown in this feature. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operational stability at the time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine due to a malfunction or the like by a simple configuration.

Feature L5. The guide portion has a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable body 360), and in the first guide state, the first movable body is the first guide. By being arranged at a position (for example, a protruding position), a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion is formed, and in the second guide state, the first guide path is formed. By arranging the two movable bodies at the second guide position (for example, the protruding position), the second guide path (for example, the second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed. Ori,
A transmission unit (transmission block 325) that transmits the power of the drive unit to the first movable body and the second movable body is provided.
When the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position, the transmission unit avoids transmission of power to the second movable body and arranges the second movable body at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L1 to L4, characterized in that the configuration is such that the transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided.

When the first movable body for the first ball entry portion and the second movable body for the second ball entry portion are used in combination, the following inconveniences may occur if the drive unit is simply shared for these movable bodies. That is, when the first movable body is moved, the second movable body moves following it, and when the second movable body is moved, the first movable body moves following it, thereby driving. There is a concern that the burden on the department will increase and the responsiveness when switching states will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first movable body is moved, the power transmission to the second movable body is avoided, and when the second movable body is moved, the power transmission to the first movable body is avoided. By avoiding the above, it is possible to suppress an increase in load when a plurality of movable bodies are driven targets and preferably suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

Feature L6. The guide portion has a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable body 360), and in the first guide state, the first movable body is the first guide. By being arranged at a position (for example, a protruding position), a first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion is formed, and in the second guide state, the first guide path is formed. By arranging the two movable bodies at the second guide position (for example, the protruding position), the second guide path (for example, the second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion is formed. Ori,
A first transmission path capable of connecting the drive unit and the first movable body and transmitting the power of the drive unit to the first movable body, and connecting the drive unit and the second movable body to the power of the drive unit. Is provided with a transmission unit (for example, a transmission block 325) forming a second transmission path capable of transmitting the second movable body.
The transmission unit cuts off the second transmission path when the first movable body is arranged at the first guide position, and the transmission unit cuts the second transmission path when the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position. 1 The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to feature L4, which is configured to cut off a transmission path.

When the guide unit is composed of the first movable body and the second movable body to make the drive unit common, the second movable body becomes a resistance when the first movable body is moved, or the second movable body becomes a second movable body. When the body is moved, the first movable body becomes a resistance, and there is a concern that the responsiveness of the state switching is lowered.

Therefore, when moving the first movable body, the transmission path of the power to the second movable body is cut off (disconnecting), and when moving the second movable body, the power to the first movable body is cut off. By cutting off the transmission path (disconnecting the connection), it is possible to suppress an increase in the load when a plurality of movable bodies are the driving targets and preferably suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

Feature L7. When the first movable body is moved to the first guide position, the second movable body stays in the non-guide position, and when the second movable body is arranged at the second guide position, the first movable body is movable. The gaming machine according to feature L5 or feature L6, wherein the body is configured to stay in a non-guided position.

As shown in this feature, the configuration shown in feature L5 etc. is suitable by devising so that the operation timings of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap and limiting the transmission target of the power from the drive unit. Can be realized.

The technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to K may be applied to the features L1 to L7.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a gaming ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the firing thereof. A ball passage (guidance rail 100) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passage among the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a section (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game board, 82 ... Actuating port unit, 83 ... Variable winning unit, 84 ... Through gate, 86 ... Out port, 162 ... Main control device, 224 ... Payout device, 242 ... Payout control device, 310 ... Housing, 311 ... Main body, 317 ... Communication passage, 321 ... Drive motor, 322 ... Output shaft, 325 ... Transmission block, 331 ... First ball entry part, 332 ... Inlet part , 334 ... Detection sensor, 341 ... Second ball entry part, 342 ... Entrance part, 344 ... Detection sensor, 350 ... First movable body, 351 ... Top surface, 355 ... Arm part, 360 ... Second movable body, 361 ... Top surface , 363 ... notch, 365 ... arm portion, 370 ... first shutter, 380 ... second shutter, 390 ... core, 391 ... first inclined portion, 392 ... second inclined portion, 395 ... receiving portion, 400 ... first Guide part, 401 ... Upper left movable plate, 402 ... Lower right movable plate, 410 ... Second guide part, 411 ... Upper right movable plate, 412 ... Lower left movable plate, 420 ... Passing part, 430 ... First movable body, 431 ... Upper side Shaft 432 ... Lower shaft 433 ... Guide groove 434 ... Guide groove 435 ... Spring 436 ... Spring 440 ... Second movable body, 441 ... Upper shaft, 442 ... Lower shaft, 443 ... Guide groove, 444 ... Guide groove, 445 ... Spring, 446 ... Spring, 450 ... Movable body, 451 ... Shaft support, 452 ... Top surface, 453 ... First inclined part, 454 ... Second inclined part, 456 ... End part, 457 ... end, 461 ... accommodating part, 470 ... movable body, 472 ... top surface, 473 ... first inclined part, 474 ... second inclined part, 481 ... first shaft part, 482 ... second shaft part, 483 ... first 1 guide groove, 484 ... second guide groove, GE1 ... first area, GE2 ... second area, GP1 ... first guide path, GP2 ... second guide path, ME ... passage area, OE ... inflow port, PE ... game Area, TE1 ... 1st detour passage, TE2 ... 2nd detour passage.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed.
A first ball entry section and a second ball entry section provided in the game area and into which the game ball enters,
A first guiding means for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion and a first guiding means for moving the game ball to a first non-guidance position where the guidance is not performed.
A second guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second entry portion and a second guiding means for moving the game ball to a second non-guided position where the guidance is not performed.
When the first guide means is arranged at the first guide position, the first guide passage for guiding the game ball to the first entry portion can be configured together with the guide path formed by the first guide means. Yes, constituting a second guide path for guiding the game balls to the second ball entrance portion with the guide path formed by the second guiding means when disposed in said second guide position by said second guide means Bei example a possible der Ru passage forming means,
The first guide passage is formed with a first insertion portion through which the passage constituent means is inserted, and the second guide passage is formed with a second insertion portion through which the passage constituent means is inserted. A gaming machine characterized by being.

Images